The next focusIR Investor Webinar takes places on 14th May with guest speakers from Blue Whale Growth Fund, Taseko Mines, Kavango Resources and CQS Natural Resources fund. Please register here.

Less Ads, More Data, More Tools Register for FREE

Pin to quick picksHSBC Holdings Regulatory News (HSBA)

Share Price Information for HSBC Holdings (HSBA)

London Stock Exchange
Share Price is delayed by 15 minutes
Get Live Data
Share Price: 705.50
Bid: 707.20
Ask: 707.30
Change: 0.50 (0.07%)
Spread: 0.10 (0.014%)
Open: 706.50
High: 714.40
Low: 705.00
Prev. Close: 705.00
HSBA Live PriceLast checked at -

Watchlists are a member only feature

Login to your account

Alerts are a premium feature

Login to your account

HSBC Holdings plc - Pillar 3 at 31 Dec 2019 Part 1

18 Feb 2020 07:00

RNS Number : 2814D
HSBC Holdings PLC
18 February 2020
 

 

 

 

HSBC Holdings plc

Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2019

 

 

Contents

 

Page

Introduction

3

Highlights

3

Key metrics

4

Pillar 3 disclosures

5

Regulatory developments

5

Risk management

7

Capital and RWAs

13

Capital management

13

Own funds

13

Leverage

15

Pillar 1 minimum capital requirements and RWA flow

17

Minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities

20

Pillar 2 and ICAAP

29

Credit risk

30

Counterparty credit risk

62

Securitisation

66

Market risk

72

Non-financial risk

80

Liquidity

82

Other risks

86

Appendices

 

Appendix I - Additional tables

87

Appendix II - Countercyclical capital buffer

104

Appendix III - Asset encumbrance

105

Appendix IV - Summary of disclosures withheld

106

Other Information

 

Abbreviations

107

Cautionary statement regarding forward-looking statements

109

Contacts

109

Unless the context requires otherwise, 'HSBC Holdings' means HSBC Holdings plc and 'HSBC', the 'Group', 'we', 'us' and 'our' refer to HSBC Holdings together with its subsidiaries. Within this document the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region of the People's Republic of China is referred to as 'Hong Kong'. When used in the terms 'shareholders' equity' and 'total shareholders' equity', 'shareholders' means holders of HSBC Holdings ordinary shares and those preference shares and capital securities issued by HSBC Holdings classified as equity. The abbreviations '$m' and '$bn' represent millions and billions (thousands of millions) of US dollars respectively.

 

 

Tables

 

 

 

 

Ref

Page

1

Key metrics (KM1/IFRS9-FL)

a

4

 

2

Reconciliation of balance sheets - financial accounting to regulatory scope of consolidation

 

9

 

3

Principal entities with a different regulatory and accounting scope of consolidation (LI3)

 

10

 

4

Differences between accounting and regulatory scopes of consolidation and mapping of financial statement categories with regulatory risk categories (LI1)

 

11

 

5

Main sources of differences between regulatory exposure amounts and carrying values in financial statements (LI2)

a

12

 

6

Own funds disclosure

b

13

 

7

Leverage ratio common disclosure (LRCom)

b

15

 

8

Summary reconciliation of accounting assets and leverage ratio exposures (LRSum)

a

16

 

9

Leverage ratio - Split of on-balance sheet exposures (excluding derivatives, SFTs and exempted exposures) (LRSpl)

b

16

 

10

Overview of RWAs (OV1)

b

18

 

11

RWA flow statements of credit risk exposures under the IRB approach (CR8)

 

18

 

12

RWA flow statements of CCR exposures under IMM (CCR7)

 

19

 

13

RWA flow statements of market risk exposures under IMA (MR2-B)

 

19

 

14

Key metrics of the resolution groups (KM2)

 

20

 

15

TLAC composition (TLAC1)

 

21

 

16

HSBC Holdings plc creditor ranking (TLAC3)

 

22

 

17

HSBC UK Bank plc creditor ranking (TLAC2) 

 

22

 

18

HSBC Bank plc creditor ranking (TLAC2) 

 

23

 

19

HSBC Asia Holdings Ltd creditor ranking (TLAC3)

 

23

 

20

The Hongkong and Shanghai Banking Corporation Ltd creditor ranking (TLAC2) 

 

23

 

21

Hang Seng Bank Ltd creditor ranking (TLAC2) 

 

24

 

22

HSBC North America Holdings Inc. creditor ranking (TLAC3)

 

24

 

23

Credit risk exposure - summary (CRB-B)

a

27

 

24

Credit quality of exposures by exposure classes and instruments (CR1-A)

 

28

 

25

Credit quality of exposures by industry or counterparty types (CR1-B)

 

30

 

26

Credit quality of exposures by geography (CR1-C)

 

31

 

27

Changes in stock of general and specific credit risk adjustments (CR2-A)

 

31

 

28

Changes in stock of defaulted loans and debt securities (CR2-B)

 

32

 

29

Credit quality of forborne exposures 

 

32

 

30

Credit quality of performing and non-performing exposures by past due days

 

33

 

31

Collateral obtained by taking possession and execution processes

 

33

 

32

Performing and non-performing exposures and related provisions

 

34

 

33

Amount of past due unimpaired and credit-impaired exposures by geographical region 

 

34

 

34

Geographical breakdown of exposures (CRB-C)

 

35

 

35

Concentration of exposures by industry or counterparty types (CRB-D)

 

37

 

36

Maturity of on-balance sheet exposures (CRB-E)

 

39

 

37

Credit risk mitigation techniques - overview (CR3)

 

41

 

38

Standardised approach - credit conversion factor ('CCF') and credit risk mitigation ('CRM') effects (CR4)

b

41

 

39

Credit risk mitigation techniques - IRB and Standardised

 

42

 

40

IRB - Effect on RWA of credit derivatives used as CRM techniques (CR7)

 

42

 

41

Standardised approach - exposures by asset class and risk weight (CR5)

b

43

 

42

Wholesale IRB credit risk models

 

46

 

43

IRB models - estimated and actual values (wholesale)

 

47

 

44

Retail IRB risk rating systems

 

48

 

45

IRB models - estimated and actual values (retail)

 

50

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

46

Wholesale IRB exposure - back-testing of probability of default (PD) per portfolio (CR9)

 

51

 

47

Retail IRB exposure - back-testing of probability of default (PD) per portfolio (CR9)

 

53

 

48

Analysis of counterparty credit risk exposure by approach (excluding centrally cleared exposures) (CCR1)

 

55

 

49

Credit valuation adjustment (CVA) capital charge (CCR2)

 

56

 

50

Standardised approach - CCR exposures by regulatory portfolio and risk weights (CCR3)

 

56

 

51

Impact of netting and collateral held on exposure values (CCR5-A)

 

56

 

52

Composition of collateral for CCR exposure (CCR5-B)

 

56

 

53

Credit derivatives exposures (CCR6)

 

57

 

54

Exposures to central counterparties (CCR8)

 

57

 

55

Securitisation exposure - movement in the year

 

59

 

56

Securitisation - asset values and impairments

 

60

 

57

Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book (SEC1)

 

60

 

58

Securitisation exposures in the trading book (SEC2)

 

61

 

59.i

Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated capital requirements - bank acting as originator or sponsor (under the pre-existing framework) (SEC3)

 

61

 

59.ii

Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated capital requirements - bank acting as originator or sponsor (under the new framework) (SEC3)

 

62

 

60.i

Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated capital requirements - bank acting as investor (under the pre-existing framework) (SEC4)

 

63

 

60.ii

Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated capital requirements - bank acting as investor (under the new framework) (SEC4)

 

63

 

61

Market risk under standardised approach (MR1)

 

64

 

62

Market risk under IMA (MR2-A)

 

64

 

63

IMA values for trading portfolios (MR3)

 

67

 

64

Prudential valuation adjustments (PV1)

 

69

 

65

Operational risk RWAs

 

70

 

66

Level and components of HSBC Group consolidated liquidity coverage ratio (LIQ1)

 

72

 

67

Analysis of on-balance sheet encumbered and unencumbered assets 

 

73

 

68

Non-trading book equity investments

 

75

 

69

Wholesale IRB exposure - by obligor grade

 

76

 

70

PD, LGD, RWA and exposure by country/territory

 

77

 

71

Retail IRB exposure - by internal PD band

 

80

 

72

IRB expected loss and CRAs - by exposure class

b

81

 

73

Credit risk RWAs - by geographical region

b

82

 

74

Standardised exposure - by credit quality step

a

83

 

75

Specialised lending on slotting approach (CR10)

 

83

 

76

IRB - Credit risk exposures by portfolio and PD range (CR6)

a

84

 

77

Counterparty credit risk - RWAs by exposure class, product and geographical region

 

90

 

78

IRB - CCR exposures by portfolio and PD scale (CCR4)

 

91

 

79

Geographical distribution of credit exposures relevant for the calculation of the countercyclical capital buffer 

 

93

 

80

Countercyclical capital buffer 

 

93

 

81

A - Assets

 

94

 

81

B - Collateral received

 

94

 

81

C - Encumbered assets/collateral received and associated liabilities

 

94

 

The Group has adopted the EU's regulatory transitional arrangements for International Financial Reporting Standard ('IFRS') 9 Financial instruments. A number of tables in this document report under this arrangement as follows:

a. Some figures (indicated with ^) within the table have been prepared on an IFRS 9 transitional basis.

b. All figures within the table have been prepared on an IFRS 9 transitional basis.

All other tables report numbers on the basis of full adoption of IFRS 9.

 

Introduction

 

Highlights

Common equity tier 1 ('CET1') ratio further strengthened over 4Q19 to 14.7% driven by RWA reduction of $22bn

http://www.rns-pdf.londonstockexchange.com/rns/2814D_1-2020-2-17.pdf

 

 

 

 

For footnotes, see page 4.

 

 

Key metrics

 

Table 1: Key metrics (KM1/IFRS9-FL)

 

 

 

At

 

 

 

31 Dec

30 Sep

30 Jun

31 Mar

31 Dec

Ref*

 

Footnotes

2019

2019

2019

2019

2018

 

Available capital ($bn)

1

 

 

 

 

 

1

Common equity tier 1 ('CET1') capital

^

124.0

 

123.8

 

126.9

 

125.8

 

121.0

 

2

CET1 capital as if IFRS 9 transitional arrangements had not been applied

 

 

123.1

 

122.9

 

126.0

 

124.9

 

120.0

 

3

Tier 1 capital

^

148.4

 

149.7

 

152.8

 

151.8

 

147.1

 

4

Tier 1 capital as if IFRS 9 transitional arrangements had not been applied

 

 

147.5

 

148.8

 

151.9

 

150.9

 

146.1

 

5

Total regulatory capital

^

172.2

 

175.1

 

178.3

 

177.8

 

173.2

 

6

Total capital as if IFRS 9 transitional arrangements had not been applied

 

 

171.3

 

174.2

 

177.4

 

176.9

 

172.2

 

 

Risk-weighted assets ('RWAs') ($bn)

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Total RWAs

 

843.4

 

865.2

 

886.0

 

879.5

 

865.3

 

8

Total RWAs as if IFRS 9 transitional arrangements had not been applied

 

 

842.9

 

864.7

 

885.5

 

878.9

 

864.7

 

 

Capital ratios (%)

1

 

 

 

 

 

9

CET1

^

14.7

 

14.3

 

14.3

 

14.3

 

14.0

 

10

CET1 as if IFRS 9 transitional arrangements had not been applied

 

 

14.6

 

14.2

 

14.2

 

14.2

 

13.9

 

11

Tier 1

^

17.6

 

17.3

 

17.2

 

17.3

 

17.0

 

12

Tier 1 as if IFRS 9 transitional arrangements had not been applied

 

 

17.5

 

17.2

 

17.2

 

17.2

 

16.9

 

13

Total capital

^

20.4

 

20.2

 

20.1

 

20.2

 

20.0

 

14

Total capital as if IFRS 9 transitional arrangements had not been applied

 

 

20.3

 

20.1

 

20.0

 

20.1

 

19.9

 

 

Additional CET1 buffer requirements as a percentage of RWA (%)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Capital conservation buffer requirement

 

 

2.50

 

2.50

 

2.50

 

2.50

 

1.88

 

 

Countercyclical buffer requirement

 

 

0.61

 

0.69

 

0.68

 

0.67

 

0.56

 

 

Bank G-SIB and/or D-SIB additional requirements

 

 

2.00

 

2.00

 

2.00

 

2.00

 

1.50

 

 

Total of bank CET1 specific buffer requirements

 

 

5.11

 

5.19

 

5.18

 

5.17

 

3.94

 

 

Total capital requirement (%)

 

2

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total capital requirement

 

 

11.0

 

11.0

 

11.0

 

11.0

 

10.9

 

 

CET1 available after meeting the bank's minimum capital requirements

 

8.5

 

8.1

 

8.1

 

8.1

 

7.9

 

 

Leverage ratio

3

 

 

 

 

 

15

Total leverage ratio exposure measure ($bn)

 

 

2,726.5

 

2,708.2

 

2,786.5

 

2,735.2

 

2,614.9

 

16

Leverage ratio (%)

^

5.3

 

5.4

 

5.4

 

5.4

 

5.5

 

17

Leverage ratio as if IFRS 9 transitional arrangements had not been applied (%)

 

 

5.3

 

5.4

 

5.3

 

5.4

 

5.5

 

 

Liquidity Coverage Ratio ('LCR')

 

4

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total high-quality liquid assets ($bn)

 

601.4

 

513.2

 

532.8

 

535.4

 

567.2

 

 

Total net cash outflow ($bn)

 

400.5

 

378.0

 

391.0

 

374.8

 

368.7

 

 

LCR ratio (%)

 

150.2

 

135.8

 

136.3

 

142.9

 

153.8

 

* The references in this and subsequent tables identify the lines prescribed in the EBA template where applicable and where there is a value.

^ Figures have been prepared on an IFRS 9 transitional basis.

1 Effective 30 June 2019, the capital figures and ratios are reported in accordance with the revised Capital Requirements Regulation and Directive, as implemented ('CRR II'). Prior period capital figures and ratios are reported on a Capital Requirements Regulation and Directive ('CRD IV') transitional basis.

2 Total capital requirement is defined as the sum of Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A capital requirements set by the Prudential Regulation Authority ('PRA'). Our Pillar 2A requirement at 31 December 2019, as per the PRA's Individual Capital Requirement based on a point in time assessment, was 3.0% of RWAs, of which 1.7% was met by CET1. The minimum requirements represent the total capital requirement to be met by CET1.

3 Effective 30 June 2019, the leverage ratio is calculated using the CRR II end point basis for capital. Prior period leverage ratios are calculated on the CRD IV end point basis for capital.

4 The EU's regulatory transitional arrangements for IFRS 9 'Financial instruments' in article 473a of the Capital Requirements Regulation do not apply to liquidity coverage measures. LCR is calculated as at the end of each period rather than using average values.

We have adopted the regulatory transitional arrangements, including paragraph four within article 473a of the Capital Requirements Regulation, published by the EU on 27 December 2017 for IFRS 9 'Financial Instruments'. These permit banks to add back to their capital base a proportion of the impact that IFRS 9 has upon their loan loss allowances during the first five years of use. The proportion that banks may add back starts at 95% in 2018, and reduces to 25% by 2022. The impact of IFRS 9 on loan loss allowances is defined as:

• the increase in loan loss allowances on day one of IFRS 9 adoption; and

• any subsequent increase in expected credit losses ('ECL') in the non-credit-impaired book thereafter.

The impact is calculated separately for portfolios using the standardised ('STD') and internal ratings based ('IRB') approaches and, for IRB portfolios, there is no add-back to capital unless loan loss allowances exceed regulatory 12-month expected losses. Any add-back must be tax affected and accompanied by a recalculation of capital deduction thresholds, exposure and RWAs.

In the current period, the add-back to the capital base amounted to $1.0bn under the STD approach with a tax impact of $0.2bn and a capital deduction threshold impact of $0.1bn. This resulted in a net add-back of $0.9bn.

 

Pillar 3 disclosures

Regulatory framework for disclosure

We are supervised on a consolidated basis in the United Kingdom ('UK') by the Prudential Regulation Authority ('PRA'), which receives information on the capital adequacy of, and sets capital requirements for, the Group as a whole. Individual banking subsidiaries are directly regulated by their local banking supervisors, who set and monitor their local capital adequacy requirements. In most jurisdictions, non-banking financial subsidiaries are also subject to the supervision and capital requirements of local regulatory authorities.

At the consolidated Group level, capital is calculated for prudential regulatory reporting purposes using the Basel III framework of the Basel Committee ('Basel') as implemented by the European Union ('EU') in CRR II, and in the PRA Rulebook for the UK banking industry. The regulators of Group banking entities outside the EU are at varying stages of implementation of Basel's framework, so local regulation in 2019 may have been on the basis of Basel I, II or III.

The Basel framework is structured around three 'pillars': the Pillar 1 minimum capital requirements and Pillar 2 supervisory review process are complemented by Pillar 3 market discipline. The aim of Pillar 3 is to produce disclosures that allow market participants to assess the scope of application by banks of the Basel framework and the rules in their jurisdiction, their capital condition, risk exposures and risk management processes, and hence their capital adequacy.

Our Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2019 comprises both quantitative and qualitative information required under Pillar 3. They are made in accordance with Part Eight of CRR II and the European Banking Authority's ('EBA') guidelines on disclosure requirements. These disclosures are supplemented by specific additional requirements of the PRA and discretionary disclosures on our part.

 

The Pillar 3 disclosures are governed by the Group's disclosure policy framework as approved by the Group Audit Committee ('GAC'). Information relating to the rationale for withholding certain disclosures is provided in Appendix IV.

 

Comparatives

To give insight into movements during the year, we provide comparative figures for the previous year or period, analytical review of variances and 'flow' tables for capital requirements. In all tables where the term 'capital requirements' is used, this represents the minimum total capital charge set at 8% of RWAs by article 92 of the Capital Requirements Regulation. Table name references and row numbering in tables identify those prescribed in the relevant EBA guidelines where applicable and where there is a value.

Where disclosures have been enhanced, or are new, we do not generally restate or provide prior year comparatives. Wherever specific rows and columns in the tables prescribed by the EBA or Basel are not applicable or immaterial to our activities, we omit them and follow the same approach for comparative disclosures.

Frequency and location

We publish comprehensive Pillar 3 disclosures annually and at interim on our website www.hsbc.com, concurrently with the release of our Annual Report and Accounts and Interim Report. Quarterly earnings releases also include regulatory information in line with the guidelines on the frequency of regulatory disclosures. Pillar 3 requirements may be met by inclusion in other disclosure media. Where we adopt this approach, references are provided to the relevant pages of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019 or other locations. We continue to engage in the work of the UK authorities and industry associations to improve the transparency and comparability of UK banks' Pillar 3 disclosures.

Material risks

Pillar 3 requires all material risks to be disclosed to provide a comprehensive view of a bank's risk profile. In addition to the disclosure in this document, other information on material risks can be found on page 83 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019. This includes:

• Credit risk (refer to page 84 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019)

• Capital and liquidity risk (refer to page 130 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019)

• Market risk (refer to page 135 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019)

• Resilience risk (refer to page 143 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019)

• Regulatory compliance risk (refer to page 144 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019)

• Financial crime and fraud risk (refer to page 145 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019)

• Model risk (refer to page 146 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019)

• Insurance manufacturing operations risk (refer to page 146 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019)

Information on climate change risk can be found on page 22 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

Capital buffers

Our geographical breakdown and institution-specific countercyclical capital buffer ('CCyB') disclosure is provided in Appendix II. The G-SIB Indicators disclosure is published annually on our website, www.hsbc.com.

Remuneration

Our remuneration policy, including the remuneration committee membership and activities, remuneration strategy and remuneration details of HSBC's Identified Staff and Material Risk Takers, is set out in the Directors' Remuneration Report on page 184 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

Regulatory developments

The UK's withdrawal from the EU

As a result of the decision of the referendum on 23 June 2016, the UK left the EU on 31 January 2020. In order to smooth the transition, the UK remains subject to EU law during an implementation period, which is currently expected to end on 31 December 2020. This implementation period may be extended by a further two years, subject to political agreement.

In preparation for the UK leaving without an agreement, a series of statutory instruments were made to transpose into UK law all of the EU laws and regulations that were directly applicable to UK firms on exit day. Although these statutory instruments were prepared for the UK leaving without a deal, it is anticipated that they will form the basis of the UK's regulation after the implementation period has ended; however, these may be subject to change to reflect the introduction of new EU law during the implementation period and the terms of any trade deal between the UK and the EU.

The Basel Committee

In December 2017, Basel published the Basel III Reforms. The package is broadly final, with Basel having completed a recalibration of the market risk RWA regime, the Fundamental Review of the Trading Book ('FRTB'), in January 2019. The remaining outstanding element is the revision of the calibration of the CVA framework, which Basel consulted on in November 2019.

The package aims for a 1 January 2022 implementation, with a five-year transitional provision for the output floor. This floor ensures that, at the end of the transitional period, banks' total

RWAs are no lower than 72.5% of those generated by the standardised approaches. The final standards will need to be transposed into the relevant local law before coming into effect.

We currently estimate our pre-mitigation RWAs could potentially rise in the range of 5% to 10% as at 1 January 2022 as a result of the regulatory changes. The primary drivers include changes in the market risk, operational risk and credit valuation adjustment methodologies, as well as the potential lack of equivalence for certain investments in funds. We plan to take action to substantially mitigate a significant proportion of the increase.

We estimate that there will be an additional RWA impact as a result of the output floor from 2026.

There remains a significant degree of uncertainty in the impact due to the number of national discretions within Basel's reforms, the need for further supporting technical standards to be developed and the lack of clarity regarding their implementation following the UK's withdrawal from the EU. Furthermore, the impact does not take into consideration the possibility of offsets against Pillar 2, which may arise as the shortcomings within Pillar 1 are addressed.

The Capital Requirements Regulation amendments

In June 2019, the EU enacted the final rules amending the Capital Requirements Regulation, known as the CRR II. This was the EU's implementation of the Financial Stability Board's ('FSB') requirements for Total Loss Absorbing Capacity ('TLAC'), known in Europe as the Minimum Requirement for Own Funds and Eligible Liabilities ('MREL'). Furthermore, it also included changes to the own funds regime.

The CRR II will also implement the first tranche of changes to the EU's legislation to reflect the Basel III Reforms, including the FRTB, revisions to the standardised approach for measuring counterparty risk, changes to the equity investments in funds rules and the new leverage ratio rules. The CRR II rules will follow a phased implementation with significant elements entering into force in 2021, in advance of Basel's timeline.

Since Basel's review of the calibration of the FRTB came too late to be included in the final CRR II text, the changes are being incorporated by way of a Delegated Act, which was published in near final format in December 2019. This introduces the FRTB in the EU as a reporting requirement only until a full impact assessment can be performed. Reporting on the standardised approach will begin 12 months after the enactment of the Delegated Act; whereas reporting on the modelled approaches will begin three years after enactment. A final date for the implementation of the FRTB in the EU has yet to be agreed.

The CRR II applies to HSBC's subsidiaries in the EU. In the UK, only the parts of the CRR II that are in force at the end of the Brexit implementation period will be transposed into UK law. As a result, any elements that are scheduled to enter into force after the end of the implementation period will need to be implemented separately by the UK.

The EU's implementation of the Basel III Reforms

The remaining elements of the Basel III Reforms will be implemented in the EU by a further set of amendments to the Capital Requirements Regulation ('CRR III'). In 2019, the European Commission ('EC') began consulting on the implementation of the CRR III, which will include reforms to credit risk, operational risk, and the output floor. The EC is expected to produce a draft CRR III text in the second quarter of 2020. The EU implementation will then be subject to an extensive negotiation process with the EU Council and Parliament. As a result, the final form of the rules remains unclear.

It is expected that the Brexit implementation period will have been completed before the CRR III enters into EU law. As a result, the UK will have to implement the remaining Basel III Reforms independently under UK law.

Other developments

In December 2019, the UK's Financial Policy Committee ('FPC') issued the latest Financial Stability Report. In the report, the FPC announced that it will increase the UK's countercyclical buffer from 1% to 2% on 16 December 2020, in order to give the UK more flexibility in times of future stress. It considers that the UK remains in a standard risk environment and as a result, the total loss absorbing capacity in the banking system should remain unchanged, notwithstanding the buffer increase. To this end, the PRA will consult in 2020 on proposals to reduce Pillar 2A requirements to reflect the additional resilience associated with a higher buffer.

The FPC also announced a review of IFRS9 and stress testing to ensure that there is a permanent solution to avoid unwarranted capital increases as a result of the interaction between the two. This may result in amendments to minimum capital requirements and TLAC.

In October 2019, the EBA published a consultation paper on draft guidelines concerning the carve-out of 'structural FX positions' from Pillar 1 market risk RWAs. The guidelines aim to ensure consistency in determining which positions qualify for the Pillar 1 carve out.

In July 2019, the Bank of England ('BoE') published its Resolvability Assessment Framework ('RAF'), which requires firms to develop capabilities to address eight identified barriers to resolvability. Banks are required to assess their resolvability in accordance with the BoE's criteria, submit this assessment by October 2020 and publish a summary by June 2021. Contemporaneously, the BoE will disclose its assessment of each firm's resolvability. The deadline for full compliance with the RAF framework is 1 January 2022.

In April 2019, the PRA issued statements setting out its expectations of how firms should manage the financial risks from climate change, focusing on governance, risk management, scenario analysis and disclosure areas. In particular, there is a requirement that the risk associated with climate change should be assessed and captured in firms' Pillar 2 assessments. The PRA also announced in December 2019 that the effects of climate change will be included in its 2021 stress test and are currently consulting on the form it might take.

Risk management

 

Our risk management framework

 

We use an enterprise-wide risk management framework across the organisation and across all risk types. It is underpinned by our risk culture.

The framework fosters continuous monitoring of the risk environment, and promotes risk awareness and sound operational and strategic decision making. It also ensures we have a consistent approach to monitoring, managing and mitigating the risks we accept and incur in our activities.

Further information on our risk management framework is set out on page 74 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019. The management and mitigation of principal risks facing the Group is described in our top and emerging risks on page 76 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

Commentary on hedging strategies and associated processes can be found in the Market risk and Securitisation sections of this document.

Culture

HSBC has long recognised the importance of a strong culture. Our culture is reinforced by our values. It is instrumental in aligning the behaviours of individuals with our attitude to assuming and managing risk, which helps to ensure that our risk profile remains in line with our risk appetite. The fostering of a strong culture is a key responsibility of our senior executives.

Our culture is also reinforced by our approach to remuneration. Individual awards, including those for senior executives, are based on compliance with our values and the achievement of financial and non-financial objectives, which are aligned to our risk appetite and global strategy.

Further information on risk and remuneration is set out on page 207 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

Risk governance

The Board has ultimate responsibility for the effective management of risk and approves our risk appetite. It is advised on risk-related matters by the Group Risk Committee ('GRC') and the Financial System Vulnerabilities Committee ('FSVC'). The final meeting of the FSVC was held on 15 January 2020, with responsibility for oversight of financial crime risk transferred to the GRC, which will continue to advise the Board on risk-related matters.

The activities of the GRC and the FSVC are set out on pages 178 to 182 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

Executive accountability for the ongoing monitoring, assessment and management of the risk environment, and the effectiveness of the risk management framework resides with the Group Chief Risk Officer ('CRO'). The CRO is supported by the Risk Management Meeting ('RMM') of the Group Management Board.

The management of financial crime risk resides with the Group Chief Compliance Officer ('COO'). The COO is supported by the Financial Crime Risk Management Meeting.

Further information is available on page 145 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

Day-to-day responsibility for risk management is delegated to senior managers with individual accountability for decision making. These senior managers are supported by global functions. All our people have a role to play in risk management. These roles are defined using the three lines of defence model, which takes into account our business and functional structures.

We use a defined executive risk governance structure to ensure appropriate oversight and accountability for risk, which facilitates the reporting and escalation to the RMM.

Further information about the Group's three lines of defence model and executive risk governance structures is available on page 75 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

Risk appetite

Risk appetite is a key component of our management of risk. It describes the type and quantum of risk that the Group is willing to accept in achieving its medium- and long-term strategic goals. At HSBC, risk appetite is managed through a global risk appetite framework and articulated in a risk appetite statement ('RAS'), which is approved biannually by the Board on the advice of the GRC.

Our risk appetite informs our strategic and financial planning process, defining the desired forward-looking risk profile of the Group. It is also integrated within other risk management tools, such as the top and emerging risks report and stress testing, to ensure consistency in risk management.

Information about our risk management tools is set out from page 73 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019. Details of the Group's overarching risk appetite are set out on page 73 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

Stress testing

HSBC operates a wide-ranging stress testing programme that supports our risk management and capital planning. It includes execution of stress tests mandated by our regulators. Our stress testing is supported by dedicated teams and infrastructure.

Our testing programme assesses our capital strength and enhances our resilience to external shocks. It also helps us understand and mitigate risks, and informs our decision about capital levels. As well as taking part in regulatory driven stress tests, we conduct our own internal stress tests.

The Group stress testing programme is overseen by the GRC, and results are reported, where appropriate, to the RMM and GRC.

Further information about stress testing and details of the Group's regulatory stress test results are set out on page 75 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

Global Risk function

We have a dedicated Global Risk function, headed by the Group Chief Risk Officer, which is responsible for the Group's risk management framework. This includes establishing global policy, monitoring risk profiles, and forward-looking risk identification and management. Global Risk is made up of sub-functions covering all risks to our operations. It is independent from the global businesses in order to provide challenge, appropriate oversight and balance in risk/return decisions. The Global Risk function operates in line with the three lines of defence model.

For further information see page 75 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

Risk management and internal control

systems

 

The Directors are responsible for maintaining and reviewing the effectiveness of risk management and internal control systems, and for determining the aggregate level and risk types they are willing to accept in achieving the Group's business objectives. On behalf of the Board, the GAC has responsibility for oversight of risk management and internal controls over financial reporting, and the GRC has responsibility for oversight of risk management and internal controls other than for financial reporting.

The Directors, through the GRC and the GAC received regular updates and confirmation that management has taken, or was taking, the necessary actions to remediate any failings or weaknesses identified through the operation of our framework of controls.

HSBC's key risk management and internal control procedures are described on page 173 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019, where the Report of the Directors on the effectiveness of internal controls can also be found.

 

Risk measurement and reporting systems

Our risk measurement and reporting systems are designed to help ensure that risks are comprehensively captured with all the attributes necessary to support well-founded decisions, that those attributes are accurately assessed, and that information is delivered in a timely manner for those risks to be successfully managed and mitigated.

Risk measurement and reporting systems are also subject to a governance framework designed to ensure that their build and implementation are fit for purpose and functioning appropriately. Risk information systems development is a key responsibility of the Global Risk function, while the development and operation of risk rating and management systems and processes are ultimately subject to the oversight of the Board.

We continue to invest significant resources in IT systems and processes in order to maintain and improve our risk management capabilities. Group standards govern the procurement and operation of systems used in our subsidiaries to process risk information within business lines and risk functions.

Risk measurement and reporting structures deployed at Group level are applied throughout global businesses and major operating subsidiaries through a common operating model for integrated risk management and control. This model sets out the respective responsibilities of Group, global business, region and country level risk functions in respect of risk governance and oversight, compliance risks, approval authorities and lending guidelines, global and local scorecards, management information and reporting, and relations with third parties such as regulators, rating agencies and auditors.

Risk analytics and model governance

 

The Global Risk function manages a number of analytics disciplines supporting the development and management of models, including those for risk rating, scoring, economic capital and stress testing; covering different risk types and business segments. The analytics functions formulate technical responses to industry developments and regulatory policy in the field of risk analytics, develops HSBC's global risk models, and oversees local model development and use around the Group toward our implementation targets for IRB approaches.

The Global Model Oversight Committee ('Global MOC') is the primary committee responsible for the oversight of Model Risk globally within HSBC. It serves an important role in providing strategic direction on the management of models and their associated risks to HSBC's businesses globally and is an essential element of the governance structure for model risk management. Global MOC is supported by Functional MOCs at the Global and Regional levels which are responsible for model risk management within their functional areas, including wholesale credit risk, market risk, retail risk, and finance.

The Global MOC meets regularly and reports to RMM. It is chaired by the Group CRO and membership includes the CEOs of the Global Businesses, and senior executives from Risk, Finance and global businesses. Through its oversight of the functional MOCs, it identifies emerging risks for all aspects of the risk rating system, ensuring that model risk is managed within our risk appetite statement, and formally advises RMM on any material model-related issues.

Models are also subject to an independent validation process and governance oversight by the Model Risk Management team within Global Risk. The team provides robust challenge to the modelling approaches used across the Group. It also ensures that the performance of those models is transparent and that their limitations are visible to key stakeholders. The development and use of data and models to meet local requirements are the responsibility of global businesses or functions, as well as regional and/or local entities under the governance of their own management, subject to overall Group policy and oversight.

Regulatory and other expectations continue to evolve with regards to our capability and practice of model risk management. We have benchmarked our capability against leading industry practice and are designing a new target operating model for Model Risk Management ('MRM') function, which sets model risk management policy, standards and model risk appetite.

Further information is available on page 146 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

Linkage to the Annual Report and Accounts

2019

Structure of the regulatory group

Assets, liabilities and post-acquisition reserves of subsidiaries

engaged in insurance activities are excluded from the regulatory

consolidation. Our investments in these insurance subsidiaries are

recorded at cost and deducted from CET1 capital, subject to

thresholds.

The regulatory consolidation also excludes special purpose entities ('SPEs') where significant risk has been transferred to third parties. Exposures to these SPEs are risk-weighted as securitisation positions for regulatory purposes.

Participating interests in banking associates are proportionally consolidated for regulatory purposes by including our share of assets, liabilities, profit and loss, and risk-weighted assets in accordance with the PRA's application of EU legislation. Non-participating significant investments, along with non-financial associates, are deducted from capital, subject to thresholds.

Table 2: Reconciliation of balance sheets - financial accounting to regulatory scope of consolidation

 

 

Accounting

balance

sheet

Deconsolidation

of insurance/

other entities

Consolidation

of banking

associates

Regulatory

balance

sheet

 

Ref †

$m

$m

$m

$m

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and balances at central banks

 

154,099

 

(26

)

299

 

154,372

 

Items in the course of collection from other banks

 

4,956

 

-

 

-

 

4,956

 

Hong Kong Government certificates of indebtedness

 

38,380

 

-

 

-

 

38,380

 

Trading assets

 

254,271

 

(822

)

-

 

253,449

 

Financial assets designated and otherwise mandatorily measured at fair value through profit or loss

 

43,627

 

(33,839

)

604

 

10,392

 

- of which: debt securities eligible as tier 2 issued by Group Financial Sector Entities ('FSEs') that are outside the regulatory scope of consolidation

r

-

 

602

 

-

 

602

 

Derivatives

 

242,995

 

(14

)

93

 

243,074

 

Loans and advances to banks

 

69,203

 

(1,309

)

1,316

 

69,210

 

Loans and advances to customers

 

1,036,743

 

(776

)

12,004

 

1,047,971

 

- of which: lending eligible as tier 2 to Group FSEs outside the regulatory scope of consolidation

r

-

 

392

 

-

 

392

 

expected credit losses on IRB portfolios

h

(6,703

)

-

 

-

 

(6,703

)

Reverse repurchase agreements - non-trading

 

240,862

 

(42

)

127

 

240,947

 

Financial investments

 

443,312

 

(66,551

)

4,485

 

381,246

 

- of which: lending eligible as tier 2 to Group FSEs outside the regulatory scope of consolidation

r

-

 

367

 

-

 

367

 

Capital invested in insurance and other entities

 

-

 

2,304

 

-

 

2,304

 

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets

 

136,680

 

(6,636

)

588

 

130,632

 

- of which: retirement benefit assets

j

8,280

 

-

 

-

 

8,280

 

Current tax assets

 

755

 

-

 

-

 

755

 

Interests in associates and joint ventures

 

24,474

 

(430

)

(4,836

)

19,208

 

- of which: positive goodwill on acquisition

e

486

 

(13

)

-

 

473

 

Goodwill and intangible assets

e

20,163

 

(9,131

)

1,222

 

12,254

 

Deferred tax assets

f

4,632

 

159

 

14

 

4,805

 

Total assets at 31 Dec 2019

 

2,715,152

 

(117,113

)

15,916

 

2,613,955

 

 

Liabilities and equity

 

 

 

 

 

Hong Kong currency notes in circulation

 

38,380

 

-

 

-

 

38,380

 

Deposits by banks

 

59,022

 

(12

)

372

 

59,382

 

Customer accounts

 

1,439,115

 

2,596

 

14,277

 

1,455,988

 

Repurchase agreements - non-trading

 

140,344

 

-

 

-

 

140,344

 

Items in course of transmission to other banks

 

4,817

 

-

 

-

 

4,817

 

Trading liabilities

 

83,170

 

59

 

-

 

83,229

 

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

 

164,466

 

(4,225

)

-

 

160,241

 

- of which:

 

 

 

 

 

included in tier 1

n

419

 

-

 

-

 

419

 

included in tier 2

o, q, i

10,130

 

-

 

-

 

10,130

 

Derivatives

 

239,497

 

27

 

127

 

239,651

 

- of which: debit valuation adjustment

i

95

 

-

 

-

 

95

 

Debt securities in issue

 

104,555

 

(2,246

)

-

 

102,309

 

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

 

118,156

 

(2,695

)

819

 

116,280

 

Current tax liabilities

 

2,150

 

(45

)

148

 

2,253

 

Liabilities under insurance contracts

 

97,439

 

(97,439

)

-

 

-

 

Provisions

 

3,398

 

(11

)

46

 

3,433

 

- of which: credit-related contingent liabilities and contractual commitments on IRB portfolios

h

357

 

-

 

-

 

357

 

Deferred tax liabilities

 

3,375

 

(1,337

)

9

 

2,047

 

Subordinated liabilities

 

24,600

 

2

 

118

 

24,720

 

- of which:

 

 

 

 

 

included in tier 1

l, n

1,825

 

-

 

-

 

1,825

 

included in tier 2

o, q

21,071

 

-

 

-

 

21,071

 

Total liabilities at 31 Dec 2019

 

2,522,484

 

(105,326

)

15,916

 

2,433,074

 

Equity

 

 

 

 

 

Called up share capital

a

10,319

 

-

 

-

 

10,319

 

Share premium account

a, l

13,959

 

-

 

-

 

13,959

 

Other equity instruments

k

20,871

 

-

 

-

 

20,871

 

Other reserves

c, g

2,127

 

1,913

 

-

 

4,040

 

Retained earnings

b, c

136,679

 

(12,595

)

-

 

124,084

 

Total shareholders' equity

 

183,955

 

(10,682

)

-

 

173,273

 

Non-controlling interests

d, m, n, p

8,713

 

(1,105

)

-

 

7,608

 

Total equity at 31 Dec 2019

 

192,668

 

(11,787

)

-

 

180,881

 

Total liabilities and equity at 31 Dec 2019

 

2,715,152

 

(117,113

)

15,916

 

2,613,955

 

† The references (a)-(r) identify balance sheet components that are used in the calculation of regulatory capital in Table 6: Own funds disclosure on page 13.

Table 3: Principal entities with a different regulatory and accounting scope of consolidation (LI3)

 

 

 

At 31 Dec 2019

 

 

Principal activities

Method of accounting consolidation

Method of regulatory consolidation

 

Footnotes

Proportional consolidation

Neither consolidated nor deducted

Deducted from capital subject to thresholds

Principal associates

 

 

 

 

 

 

The Saudi British Bank

 

Banking services

 Equity

l

 

 

Principal insurance entities excluded from the regulatory consolidation

 

 

 

 

 

 

HSBC Life (International) Ltd

 

Life insurance manufacturing

 Fully consolidated

 

 

l

HSBC Assurances Vie (France)

 

Life insurance manufacturing

 Fully consolidated

 

 

l

Hang Seng Insurance Company Ltd

 

Life insurance manufacturing

 Fully consolidated

 

 

l

HSBC Insurance (Singapore) Pte Ltd

 

Life insurance manufacturing

 Fully consolidated

 

 

l

HSBC Life (UK) Ltd

 

Life insurance manufacturing

 Fully consolidated

 

 

l

HSBC Life Insurance Company Ltd

 

Life insurance manufacturing

 Fully consolidated

 

 

l

HSBC Life Assurance (Malta) Ltd

 

Life insurance manufacturing

 Fully consolidated

 

 

l

HSBC Seguros S.A. (Mexico)

 

Life insurance manufacturing

 Fully consolidated

 

 

l

Principal SPEs excluded from the regulatory consolidation

1

 

 

 

 

 

Metrix Portfolio Distribution plc

 

Securitisation

 Fully consolidated

 

l

 

Neon Portfolio Distribution DAC

 

Securitisation

 Fully consolidated

 

l

 

Regency Assets Ltd

 

Securitisation

 Fully consolidated

 

l

 

1 These SPEs issued no or de minimis share capital.

Measurement of regulatory exposures

This section sets out the main reasons why the measurement of regulatory exposures is not directly comparable with the financial information presented in the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

The Pillar 3 Disclosures at 31 December 2019 are prepared in accordance with regulatory capital adequacy concepts and rules, while the Annual Report and Accounts 2019 are prepared in accordance with IFRSs. The purpose of the regulatory balance sheet is to provide a point-in-time ('PIT') value of all on-balance sheet assets.

The regulatory exposure value includes an estimation of risk, and is expressed as the amount expected to be outstanding if and when the counterparty defaults.

Moreover, regulatory exposure classes are based on different criteria from accounting asset types and are therefore not comparable on a line by line basis.

The following tables show in two steps how the accounting values in the regulatory balance sheet link to regulatory exposure at default ('EAD').

Table 4 shows the difference between the accounting and regulatory scope of consolidation, and a breakdown of the accounting balances into the risk types that form the basis for regulatory capital requirements. Table 5 then shows the main differences between the accounting balances and regulatory exposures by regulatory risk type.

 

Table 4: Differences between accounting and regulatory scopes of consolidation and mapping of financial statement categories with

regulatory risk categories (LI1)

 

 

 

Carrying value of items

 

Carrying values as reported in published financial statements

Carrying values under scope of regulatory consolidation1

Subject to the credit risk framework

Subject to the counter-party credit risk framework2

Subject to the securitisation framework3

Subject to the market risk framework

Subject to deduction from capital or not subject to regulatory capital requirements

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and balances at central banks

154.1

 

154.4

 

154.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

Items in the course of collection from other banks

5.0

 

5.0

 

5.0

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

Hong Kong Government certificates of indebtedness

38.4

 

38.4

 

38.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

Trading assets

254.3

 

253.4

 

1.2

 

21.3

 

-

 

253.4

 

-

 

Financial assets designated and otherwise mandatorily measured at fair value

43.6

 

10.4

 

4.2

 

3.9

 

2.3

 

-

 

-

 

Derivatives

243.0

 

243.1

 

-

 

242.0

 

1.1

 

243.1

 

-

 

Loans and advances to banks

69.2

 

69.2

 

68.5

 

-

 

0.7

 

-

 

-

 

Loans and advances to customers

1,036.7

 

1,048.0

 

1,021.5

 

2.9

 

23.6

 

-

 

-

 

Reverse repurchase agreements - non-trading

240.9

 

240.9

 

-

 

240.9

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

Financial investments

443.3

 

381.2

 

381.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

Capital invested in insurance and other entities

-

 

2.3

 

1.5

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.8

 

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets

136.7

 

130.6

 

47.1

 

55.6

 

-

 

14.8

 

19.5

 

Current tax assets

0.8

 

0.8

 

0.8

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

Interests in associates and joint ventures

24.5

 

19.2

 

11.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

7.6

 

Goodwill and intangible assets

20.1

 

12.3

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

12.0

 

Deferred tax assets

4.6

 

4.8

 

6.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

(1.8

)

Total assets at 31 Dec 2019

2,715.2

 

2,614.0

 

1,742.0

 

566.6

 

27.7

 

511.3

 

38.1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Hong Kong currency notes in circulation

38.4

 

38.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

38.4

 

Deposits by banks

59.0

 

59.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

59.4

 

Customer accounts

1,439.1

 

1,456.0

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1,456.0

 

Repurchase agreements - non-trading

140.3

 

140.3

 

-

 

140.3

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

Items in course of transmission to other banks

4.8

 

4.8

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

4.8

 

Trading liabilities

83.2

 

83.2

 

-

 

10.3

 

-

 

83.2

 

-

 

Financial liabilities designated at FV

164.5

 

160.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

62.1

 

98.1

 

Derivatives

239.5

 

239.7

 

-

 

239.7

 

-

 

239.7

 

-

 

Debt securities in issue

104.6

 

102.3

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

102.3

 

Accruals, deferred income, and other liabilities

118.2

 

116.3

 

-

 

56.6

 

-

 

-

 

59.7

 

Current tax liabilities

2.1

 

2.3

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.3

 

Liabilities under insurance contract

97.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

Provisions

3.4

 

3.4

 

0.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.8

 

Deferred tax liabilities

3.4

 

2.1

 

2.0

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.3

 

Subordinated liabilities

24.6

 

24.7

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

24.7

 

Total liabilities at 31 Dec 2019

2,522.5

 

2,433.1

 

2.6

 

446.9

 

-

 

385.0

 

1,850.8

 

1 The amounts shown in the column 'Carrying values under scope of regulatory consolidation' do not equal the sum of the amounts shown in the remaining columns of this table for line items 'Derivatives', 'Trading assets' and 'Prepayments, accrued income and other assets' as some of the assets in this column are subject to regulatory capital charges for both CCR and market risk.

2 The amounts shown in the column 'Subject to the counterparty credit risk framework' include both non-trading book and trading book.

3 The amounts shown in the column 'Subject to the securitisation framework' are non-trading book positions. Trading book securitisation positions are included in the market risk column.

 

Table 5: Main sources of differences between regulatory exposure amounts and carrying values in financial statements (LI2)

 

 

 

Of which items subject to:

 

 

Total

Credit risk framework

CCR framework

Securitisation framework

 

Footnotes

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

Carrying value of assets within scope of regulatory consolidation

1

2,575.9

 

1,742.0

 

566.6

 

27.7

 

Carrying value of liabilities within scope of regulatory consolidation

1

582.3

 

2.6

 

446.9

 

-

 

Net carrying value within scope of regulatory consolidation

 

1,993.6

 

1,739.4

 

119.7

 

27.7

 

Off-balance sheet amounts and potential future exposure for counterparty risk

 

865.5

 

275.6

 

52.9

 

11.2

 

Differences in netting rules

 

4.1

 

10.1

 

(6.0

)

-

 

Differences due to financial collateral on standardised approach

 

(5.2

)

(5.2

)

-

 

-

 

Differences due to expected credit losses on IRB approach

 

6.5

 

6.5

 

-

 

-

 

Differences due to EAD modelling and other differences

 

5.3

 

7.7

 

-

 

(2.4

)

Differences due to credit risk mitigation

 

(10.8

)

-

 

(10.8

)

-

 

Exposure values considered for regulatory purposes at 31 Dec 2019

 

2,859.0

 

2,034.1

 

155.8

 

36.5

 

1 Excludes amounts subject to deduction from capital or not subject to regulatory capital requirements.

Explanations of differences between accounting and regulatory exposure amounts

Off-balance sheet amounts and potential future exposure for counterparty risk

Off-balance sheet amounts subject to credit risk and securitisation regulatory frameworks include undrawn portions of committed facilities, various trade finance commitments and guarantees. We apply a credit conversion factor ('CCF') to these items and add potential future exposures ('PFE') for counterparty credit risk.

Differences in netting rules

The increase from carrying value due to differences in netting rules is the reversal of amounts deducted from gross loans and advances to customers in the published financial statements in accordance with the offsetting criteria of IAS 32 'Financial instruments: presentation'.

Differences due to financial collateral

Exposure value under the standardised approach is calculated after deducting credit risk mitigation whereas accounting value is before such deductions.

Differences due to expected credit losses

The carrying value of assets is net of credit risk adjustments. The regulatory exposure value under IRB approaches is before deducting credit risk adjustments.

Differences due to EAD modelling

The carrying value of assets is usually measured at amortised cost or fair value as at the balance sheet date. For certain IRB models, the exposure value used as EAD is the projected value over the next year.

Differences due to credit risk mitigation

In counterparty credit risk ('CCR'), differences arise between accounting carrying values and regulatory exposure as a result of the application of credit risk mitigation and the use of modelled exposures.

Explanation of differences between accounting fair value and regulatory prudent valuation

Fair value is defined as the best estimate of the price that would be received to sell an asset or be paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date.

Some fair value adjustments already reflect valuation uncertainty to some degree. These are market data uncertainty, model uncertainty and concentration adjustments.

However, it is recognised that a variety of valuation techniques using stressed assumptions and combined with the range of plausible market parameters at a given point in time may still generate unexpected uncertainty beyond fair value.

A series of additional valuation adjustments ('AVAs') are therefore required to reach a specified degree of confidence (the 'prudent value') set by regulators that differs both in terms of scope and measurement from HSBC's own quantification for disclosure purposes.

AVAs should consider at the minimum: market price uncertainty, bid-offer (close-out) uncertainty, model risk, concentration, administrative costs, unearned credit spreads and investing and funding costs.

AVAs are not limited to level 3 exposures, for which a 95% uncertainty range is already computed and disclosed, but must also be calculated for any exposure for which the exit price cannot be determined with a high degree of certainty. Table 64 presents further information on the prudent valuation adjustment.

Capital and RWAs

 

Capital management

Approach and policy

Our approach to capital management is driven by our strategic and organisational requirements, taking into account the regulatory, economic and commercial environment. We aim to maintain a strong capital base to support the risks inherent in our business and invest in accordance with our strategy, meeting both consolidated and local regulatory capital requirements at all times.

Our capital management process culminates in the annual Group capital plan, which is approved by the Board. HSBC Holdings is the primary provider of equity capital to its subsidiaries and also provides them with non-equity and loss-absorbing capital where necessary. These investments are substantially funded by HSBC Holdings' issuance of equity and non-equity capital and by profit retention. As part of its capital management process, HSBC Holdings seeks to maintain a balance between the composition of its capital and its investment in subsidiaries, including management of double leverage. Subject to the above, there is no current or foreseen impediment to HSBC Holdings' ability to provide such investments.

Each subsidiary manages its own capital to support its planned business growth and meet its local regulatory requirements within the context of the Group capital plan. Capital generated by subsidiaries in excess of planned requirements is returned to HSBC Holdings, normally by way of dividends, in accordance with the Group's capital plan.

During 2019, the Group's subsidiaries paid dividends consistent with their financial performance and local regulatory regimes, informed by the Group's capital plan. No significant restrictions are envisaged with respect to the payment of planned dividends or payments.

However, the ability of subsidiaries to pay dividends or advance monies to HSBC Holdings depends on, among other things, their respective local regulatory capital and banking requirements, exchange controls, statutory reserves, and financial and operating performance. None of our subsidiaries that are excluded from the regulatory consolidation have capital resources below their minimum regulatory requirement. HSBC Holdings has not entered into any Group Financial Support Agreements pursuant to the application of early intervention measures under the Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive.

All capital securities included in the capital base of HSBC have either been issued as fully compliant CRD IV securities (on an end point basis) or in accordance with the rules and guidance in the PRA's previous General Prudential Sourcebook, which are included in the capital base by virtue of the application of CRR II. The main features of capital securities issued by the Group, categorised as tier 1 ('T1') capital and tier 2 ('T2') capital, are set out on the HSBC website, www.hsbc.com.

The values disclosed are the IFRS balance sheet carrying amounts, not the amounts that these securities contribute to regulatory capital. For example, the IFRS accounting and the regulatory treatments differ in their approaches to issuance costs, regulatory amortisation and regulatory eligibility limits prescribed by the relevant regulatory legislation.

A list of the main features of our capital instruments in accordance with Annex III of Commission Implementing Regulation 1423/2013 is also published on our website with reference to our balance sheet on 31 December 2019. This is in addition to the full terms and conditions of our securities, also available on our website.

For further details of our approach to capital risk management, please see page 130 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

Own funds

 

Table 6: Own funds disclosure

 

 

 

 

At31 DecAt

 

 

 

31 Dec

2019

31 Dec2018

Ref*

 

Ref †

$m

$m

 

Common equity tier 1 ('CET1') capital: instruments and reserves

 

 

 

1

Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts

 

22,873

 

22,384

 

 

- ordinary shares

a

22,873

 

22,384

 

2

Retained earnings

b

127,188

 

121,180

 

3

Accumulated other comprehensive income (and other reserves)

c

1,735

 

3,368

 

5

Minority interests (amount allowed in consolidated CET1)

d

4,865

 

4,854

 

5a

Independently reviewed interim net profits net of any foreseeable charge or dividend

b

(3,381

)

3,697

 

6

Common equity tier 1 capital before regulatory adjustments

 

153,280

 

155,483

 

 

Common equity tier 1 capital: regulatory adjustments

 

 

 

7

Additional value adjustments1

 

(1,327

)

(1,180

)

8

Intangible assets (net of related deferred tax liability)

e

(12,372

)

(17,323

)

10

Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability excluding those arising from temporary differences (net of related tax liability)

f

(1,281

)

(1,042

)

11

Fair value reserves related to gains or losses on cash flow hedges

g

(41

)

135

 

12

Negative amounts resulting from the calculation of expected loss amounts

h

(2,424

)

(1,750

)

14

Gains or losses on liabilities valued at fair value resulting from changes in own credit standing

i

2,450

 

298

 

15

Defined benefit pension fund assets

j

(6,351

)

(6,070

)

16

Direct and indirect holdings of own CET1 instruments2

 

(40

)

(40

)

19

Direct, indirect and synthetic holdings by the institution of the CET1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment in those entities (amount above 10% threshold and net of eligible short positions)3

 

(7,928

)

(7,489

)

28

Total regulatory adjustments to common equity tier 1

 

(29,314

)

(34,461

)

29

Common equity tier 1 capital

 

123,966

 

121,022

 

 

Additional tier 1 ('AT1') capital: instruments

 

 

 

30

Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts

 

20,871

 

22,367

 

31

- classified as equity under IFRSs

k

20,871

 

22,367

 

33

Amount of qualifying items and the related share premium accounts subject to phase out

from AT1

l

2,305

 

2,297

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Table 6: Own funds disclosure (continued)

 

 

 

 

At

 

 

 

31 Dec

2019

31 Dec2018

Ref*

 

Ref †

$m

$m

34

Qualifying tier 1 capital included in consolidated AT1 capital (including minority interests not included in CET1) issued by subsidiaries and held by third parties

m, n

1,277

 

1,516

 

35

- of which: instruments issued by subsidiaries subject to phase out

n

1,218

 

1,298

 

36

Additional tier 1 capital before regulatory adjustments

 

24,453

 

26,180

 

 

Additional tier 1 capital: regulatory adjustments

 

 

 

37

Direct and indirect holdings of own AT1 instruments2

 

(60

)

(60

)

43

Total regulatory adjustments to additional tier 1 capital

 

(60

)

(60

)

44

Additional tier 1 capital

 

24,393

 

26,120

 

45

Tier 1 capital (T1 = CET1 + AT1)

 

148,359

 

147,142

 

 

Tier 2 capital: instruments and provisions

 

 

 

46

Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts

o

20,525

 

20,249

 

 

- of which: instruments grandfathered under CRR II

 

7,067

 

N/A

48

Qualifying own funds instruments included in consolidated T2 capital (including minority interests and AT1 instruments not included in CET1 or AT1) issued by subsidiaries and held by third parties4

p, q

4,667

 

6,480

 

49

- of row 48: instruments issued by subsidiaries subject to phase out

q

2,251

 

1,585

 

 

- of row 48: instruments issued by subsidiaries grandfathered under CRR II

 

1,452

 

N/A

51

Tier 2 capital before regulatory adjustments

 

25,192

 

26,729

 

 

Tier 2 capital: regulatory adjustments

 

 

 

52

Direct and indirect holdings of own T2 instruments2

 

(40

)

(40

)

55

Direct and indirect holdings by the institution of the T2 instruments and subordinated loans of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment in those entities (net of eligible short positions)

r

(1,361

)

(593

)

57

Total regulatory adjustments to tier 2 capital

 

(1,401

)

(633

)

58

Tier 2 capital

 

23,791

 

26,096

 

59

Total capital (TC = T1 + T2)

 

172,150

 

173,238

 

60

Total risk-weighted assets

 

843,395

 

865,318

 

 

Capital ratios and buffers

 

 

 

61

Common equity tier 1

 

14.7%

14.0%

62

Tier 1

 

17.6%

17.0%

63

Total capital

 

20.4%

20.0%

64

Institution specific buffer requirement

 

5.11%

3.94%

65

- capital conservation buffer requirement

 

2.50%

1.88%

66

- counter-cyclical buffer requirement

 

0.61%

0.56%

67a

- Global Systemically Important Institution ('G-SII') buffer

 

2.00%

1.50%

68

Common equity tier 1 available to meet buffers

 

8.5%

7.9%

 

Amounts below the threshold for deduction (before risk weighting)

 

 

 

72

Direct and indirect holdings of the capital of financial sector entities where the institution does not have a significant investment in those entities (amount below 10% threshold and net of eligible short positions)

 

2,938

 

2,534

 

73

Direct and indirect holdings by the institution of the CET1 instruments of financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment in those entities (amount below 10% threshold and net of eligible short positions)

 

13,189

 

12,851

 

75

Deferred tax assets arising from temporary differences (amount below 10% threshold, net of related tax liability)

 

4,529

 

4,956

 

 

Applicable caps on the inclusion of provisions in tier 2

 

 

 

77

Cap on inclusion of credit risk adjustments in T2 under standardised approach

 

2,163

 

2,200

 

79

Cap for inclusion of credit risk adjustments in T2 under internal ratings-based approach

 

3,128

 

3,221

 

 

Capital instruments subject to phase-out arrangements (only applicable until 1 Jan 2022)

 

 

 

82

Current cap on AT1 instruments subject to phase out arrangements

 

5,191

 

6,921

 

83

Amount excluded from AT1 due to cap (excess over cap after redemptions and maturities)

 

122

 

-

 

84

Current cap on T2 instruments subject to phase out arrangements

 

2,737

 

5,131

 

 

† The references (a) - (r) identify balance sheet components in Table 2: Reconciliation of balance sheets - financial accounting to regulatory scope of consolidation on page 9 which are used in the calculation of regulatory capital.

1 Additional value adjustments are deducted from CET1. These are calculated on all assets measured at fair value.

2 The deduction for holdings of own CET1, T1 and T2 instruments is set by the PRA.

3 The threshold deduction for significant investments is drawn from numerous lines of the balance sheet and includes: investments in insurance subsidiaries and non-consolidated associates, other CET1 equity held in financial institutions, and connected funding of a capital nature.

4 Eligible instruments issued by subsidiaries previously reported in row 46 'Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts' are now reported here. For comparative purposes, 2018 data have been re-presented to reflect this change.

At 31 December 2019, our CET1 ratio increased to 14.7% from 14.0% at 31 December 2018. CET1 capital increased during the year by $2.9bn, mainly as a result of:

• capital generation of $6.0bn through profits

• a fall in the deduction for intangible assets of $4.9bn. This was primarily due to $7.3bn of goodwill impairment, partly offset by an increase in internally generated software;

• a $1.5bn increase in FVOCI reserve; and

• favourable foreign currency translation differences of $1.0bn.

These increases were partly offset by:

• dividends and scrip of $9.0bn;

• share buy-back of $1.0bn; and

• an increase in the deduction for excess expected loss $0.7bn.

RWAs reduced by $21.9bn during the year. Excluding foreign currency translation differences, the remaining decrease of $26.9bn was primarily driven by methodology and policy changes and model updates which reduced RWAs by $39.9bn. These reductions were partly offset by increases of $12.7bn from movements in asset quality and size, including both RWA increases due to overall lending growth and reductions as a result of active portfolio management.

Leverage

The risk of excessive leverage is managed as part of HSBC's global risk appetite framework and monitored using a leverage ratio metric within our RAS. The RAS articulates the aggregate level and types of risk that HSBC is willing to accept in its business activities in order to achieve its strategic business objectives. The RAS is monitored via the risk appetite profile report, which includes comparisons of actual performance against the risk appetite and tolerance thresholds assigned to each metric, to ensure that any excessive risk is highlighted, assessed and mitigated appropriately. The risk appetite profile report is presented monthly to the RMM and the GRC.

Our approach to risk appetite is described on page 73 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

Table 7: Leverage ratio common disclosure (LRCom)

 

 

 

At 31 Dec

 

 

 

2019^

2018

Ref*

 

Footnotes

$bn

$bn

 

On-balance sheet exposures (excluding derivatives and SFT)

 

 

 

1

On-balance sheet items (excluding derivatives, SFTs and fiduciary assets, but including collateral)

 

2,119.1

 

2,012.5

 

2

(Asset amounts deducted in determining tier 1 capital)

 

(30.5

)

(33.8

)

3

Total on-balance sheet exposures (excluding derivatives, SFTs and fiduciary assets)

 

2,088.6

 

1,978.7

 

 

Derivative exposures

 

 

 

4

Replacement cost associated with all derivatives transactions (i.e. net of eligible cash variation margin)

 

53.5

 

44.2

 

5

Add-on amounts for potential future exposure ('PFE') associated with all derivatives transactions (mark-to-market method)

 

162.1

 

154.1

 

6

Gross-up for derivatives collateral provided where deducted from the balance sheet assets pursuant to IFRSs

 

8.3

 

5.9

 

7

(Deductions of receivables assets for cash variation margin provided in derivatives transactions)

 

(43.1

)

(21.5

)

8

(Exempted central counterparty ('CCP') leg of client-cleared trade exposures)

 

(53.2

)

(38.0

)

9

Adjusted effective notional amount of written credit derivatives

 

159.4

 

160.9

 

10

(Adjusted effective notional offsets and add-on deductions for written credit derivatives)

 

(150.4

)

(153.4

)

11

Total derivative exposures

 

136.6

 

152.2

 

 

Securities financing transaction exposures

 

 

 

12

Gross SFT assets (with no recognition of netting), after adjusting for sales accounting transactions

1

451.0

 

429.8

 

13

(Netted amounts of cash payables and cash receivables of gross SFT assets)

1

(196.1

)

(184.5

)

14

Counterparty credit risk exposure for SFT assets

 

10.7

 

11.3

 

16

Total securities financing transaction exposures

 

265.6

 

256.6

 

 

Other off-balance sheet exposures

 

 

 

17

Off-balance sheet exposures at gross notional amount

 

865.5

 

829.8

 

18

(Adjustments for conversion to credit equivalent amounts)

 

(629.8

)

(602.4

)

19

Total off-balance sheet exposures

 

235.7

 

227.4

 

 

Capital and total exposures

 

 

 

20

Tier 1 capital

 

144.8

 

143.5

 

21

Total leverage ratio exposure

 

2,726.5

 

2,614.9

 

22

Leverage ratio (%)

 

5.3

 

5.5

 

EU-23

Choice of transitional arrangements for the definition of the capital measure

 

Fully phased-in

Fully phased-in

^ Figures have been prepared on an IFRS 9 transitional basis.

1 At 31 December 2018, netting of $180.9bn relating to SFT assets was recognised. This had no impact on the total leverage ratio exposure. Comparatives have been restated.

Our leverage ratio calculated in accordance with the Capital Requirements Regulation was 5.3% at 31 December 2019, down from 5.5% at 31 December 2018. The increase in exposure was primarily due to growth in customer lending and financial investments.

At 31 December 2019, the Group's leverage ratio measured under the PRA's UK leverage framework was 5.7%. This measure excludes qualifying central bank balances from the calculation of exposure.

 

At 31 December 2019, our UK minimum leverage ratio requirement of 3.25% under the PRA's UK leverage framework was supplemented by an additional leverage ratio buffer of 0.7% and a countercyclical leverage ratio buffer of 0.2%. These additional buffers translated into capital values of $17.7bn and $5.4bn respectively. We exceeded these leverage requirements.

For further details of the UK leverage ratio, please see page 155 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

 

The following table provides a reconciliation of the total assets in our published balance sheet under IFRS and the total leverage exposure:

Table 8: Summary reconciliation of accounting assets and leverage ratio exposures (LRSum)

 

 

At 31 Dec

 

 

2019

2018

Ref*

 

$bn

$bn

1

Total assets as per published financial statements

2,715.2

 

2,558.1

 

 

Adjustments for:

 

 

2

- entities which are consolidated for accounting purposes but are outside the scope of regulatory consolidation

(101.2

)

(89.5

)

4

- derivative financial instruments

(106.4

)

(55.6

)

5

- securities financing transactions ('SFT')

2.8

 

(5.1

)

6

- off-balance sheet items (i.e. conversion to credit equivalent amounts of off-balance sheet exposures)

235.7

 

227.4

 

7

- other

(19.6

)

(20.4

)

8

Total leverage ratio exposure

2,726.5

 

2,614.9

 

 

The table below provides a breakdown of on-balance sheet exposures excluding derivatives, SFTs and exempted exposures, by asset class:

Table 9: Leverage ratio - Split of on-balance sheet exposures (excluding derivatives, SFTs and exempted exposures) (LRSpl)

 

 

At 31 Dec

 

 

2019

2018

Ref*

 

$bn

$bn

EU-1

Total on-balance sheet exposures (excluding derivatives, SFTs and exempted exposures)

2,076.0

 

1,991.0

 

EU-2

- trading book exposures

230.8

 

218.5

 

EU-3

- banking book exposures

1,845.2

 

1,772.5

 

 

'banking book exposures' comprises:

 

 

EU-4

covered bonds

2.6

 

1.6

 

EU-5

exposures treated as sovereigns

539.3

 

507.3

 

EU-6

exposures to regional governments, multilateral development banks ('MDB'), international organisations and public sector entities not treated as sovereigns

9.4

 

9.3

 

EU-7

institutions

59.3

 

66.8

 

EU-8

secured by mortgage of immovable property

330.4

 

300.0

 

EU-9

retail exposures

106.2

 

82.8

 

EU-10

corporate

603.2

 

614.3

 

EU-11

exposures in default

9.9

 

9.1

 

EU-12

other exposures (e.g. equity, securitisations and other non-credit obligation assets)

184.9

 

181.3

 

Pillar 1 minimum capital requirements and

RWA flow

Pillar 1 covers the minimum capital resource requirements for credit risk, counterparty credit risk, equity, securitisation, market

risk and operational risk. These requirements are expressed in terms of RWAs. The table provides information on the scope of permissible approaches and our adopted approach by risk type.

 

 

 

Credit risk

The Basel framework applies three approaches of increasing sophistication to the calculation of Pillar 1 credit risk capital requirements. The most basic level, the standardised approach, requires banks to use external credit ratings to determine the risk weightings applied to rated counterparties. Other counterparties are grouped into broad categories and standardised risk weightings are applied to these categories. The next level, the foundation IRB ('FIRB') approach, allows banks to calculate their credit risk capital requirements on the basis of their internal assessment of a counterparty's probability of default ('PD'), but subjects their quantified estimates of EAD and loss given default ('LGD') to standard supervisory parameters. Finally, the advanced IRB ('AIRB') approach allows banks to use their own internal assessment in determining PD and in quantifying EAD and LGD.

For consolidated Group reporting, we have adopted the AIRB approach for the majority of our business.

Some portfolios remain on the standardised or FIRB approaches:

pending the issuance of local regulations or model approval;

following supervisory prescription of a non-advanced approach; or

under exemptions from IRB treatment.

 

 

 

 

Counterparty credit risk

Four approaches to calculating CCR and determining exposure values are defined by Basel: mark-to-market, original exposure, standardised and internal model method ('IMM'). These exposure values are used to determine capital requirements under one of the three approaches to credit risk: standardised, FIRB or AIRB.

We use the mark-to-market and IMM approaches for CCR. Details of the IMM permission we have received from the PRA can be found in the Financial Services Register on the PRA website. Our aim is to increase the proportion of positions on IMM over time.

Equity

For the non-trading book, equity exposures can be assessed under standardised or IRB approaches.

For Group reporting purposes, all non-trading book equity exposures are treated under the standardised approach.

Securitisation

Basel specifies two approaches for calculating credit risk requirements for securitisation positions in non-trading books: the standardised approach and the IRB approach, which incorporates the ratings based method ('RBM'), the internal assessment approach ('IAA') and the supervisory formula method ('SFM'). Securitisation positions in the trading book are treated within the market risk framework, using the CRD IV standard rules.

On 1 January 2019, the new securitisation framework came into force in the EU for new transactions. This framework prescribes the following approaches:

internal ratings-based approach ('SEC-IRBA');

external ratings-based approach ('SEC-ERBA');

internal assessment approach ('IAA'); and

standardised approach ('SEC-SA').

From 1 January 2020, all transactions will be subject to the new framework.

For the majority of the non-trading book securitisation positions, we use the IRB approach, and within this principally the RBM, with lesser amounts on the IAA and the SFM. We also use the standardised approach for an immaterial amount of non-trading book positions. We follow the CRD IV standard rules for the securitisation positions in the trading book.

Our exposures subject to the new framework in 2019 include exposures under SEC-IRBA,SEC-ERBA, IAA and SEC-SA.

Market risk

Market risk capital requirements are calculated using a combination of standard rules and the internal models approach ('IMA'). The latter involves the use of internal value at risk ('VaR') models to measure market risks and determine the appropriate capital requirement. The internal model approach also includes stressed VaR ('SVaR') and incremental risk charge ('IRC'). HSBC does not use or need a Comprehensive Risk Model ('CRM').

The market risk capital requirement is measured using internal market risk models, where approved by the PRA, or under the standard rules. Our internal market risk models comprise VaR, stressed VaR and IRC. Non-proprietary details of the scope of our IMA permission are available in the Financial Services Register on the PRA website. We are in compliance with the requirements regarding i) rules and procedures for inclusion of positions within trading books and ii) application of prudent valuation adjustments to trading book positions.

 

 

Operational risk

Basel allows firms to calculate their operational risk capital requirement under the basic indicator approach, the standardised approach or the advanced measurement approach.

We currently use the standardised approach in determining our operational risk capital requirement. We have in place an operational risk model that is used for economic capital calculation purposes.

 

Table 10: Overview of RWAs (OV1)

 

 

At

 

 

31 Dec

30 Sep

31 Dec

 

 

2019

2019

2019

 

 

RWAs

RWAs

Capital

required

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Credit risk (excluding counterparty credit risk)

624.3

 

636.6

 

50.0

 

2

- standardised approach

126.1

 

129.3

 

10.1

 

3

- foundation IRB approach

32.3

 

31.0

 

2.6

 

4

- advanced IRB approach

465.9

 

476.3

 

37.3

 

6

Counterparty credit risk

43.9

 

49.6

 

3.5

 

7

- mark-to-market

20.6

 

23.4

 

1.7

 

10

- internal model method

18.7

 

20.4

 

1.5

 

11

- risk exposure amount for contributions to the default fund of a central counterparty

0.6

 

0.5

 

-

 

12

- credit valuation adjustment

4.0

 

5.3

 

0.3

 

13

Settlement risk

0.2

 

0.2

 

-

 

14

Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book

8.3

 

6.9

 

0.7

 

15

- IRB ratings based method

1.8

 

2.2

 

0.1

 

17

- IRB internal assessment approach

0.6

 

1.0

 

0.1

 

18

- standardised approach

1.3

 

1.3

 

0.1

 

14a

- exposures subject to the new securitisation framework1

4.6

 

2.4

 

0.4

 

19

Market risk

29.9

 

36.9

 

2.4

 

20

- standardised approach

7.8

 

8.1

 

0.6

 

21

- internal models approach

22.1

 

28.8

 

1.8

 

23

Operational risk

92.8

 

91.1

 

7.4

 

25

- standardised approach

92.8

 

91.1

 

7.4

 

27

Amounts below the thresholds for deduction (subject to 250% risk weight)

44.0

 

43.9

 

3.5

 

29

Total

843.4

 

865.2

 

67.5

 

1 On 1 January 2019, a new securitisation framework came into force in the EU for new transactions. Existing positions are subject to 'grandfathering' provisions and will transfer to the new framework on 1 January 2020. Our exposures subject to the approaches under the new framework at 31 December 2019 include $1.7bn under the external ratings-based approach, $5.2bn under the internal ratings-based approach, $7.1bn under the internal assessment approach, and $5.8bn under the standardised approach.

Credit risk (including amounts below the thresholds for deduction)

RWAs decreased by $12.2bn in the fourth quarter of the year including an increase of $16.6bn due to foreign currency translation differences. Excluding foreign currency translation differences, the remaining decrease of $28.8bn was primarily driven by asset size decreases of $13.7bn, reflecting active portfolio management, and reductions of $7.3bn due to changes to methodology and policy. These included the effect of risk parameter refinements and securitisation transactions. A further reduction of $5.7bn was due to model updates, especially to global corporate and Private Banking models.

Counterparty credit risk

Counterparty credit risk (including settlement risk) RWAs decreased by $5.7bn primarily due to management initiatives totalling $3.5bn - including hedging, improved collateral recognition and parameter refinements. In addition, lower derivative exposures reduced RWAs by $1.7bn.

Securitisation

The $1.4bn RWA increase is primarily due to new securitisation transactions. During the period, exposures moved from the pre-existing securitisation framework to the new framework due to new deals on existing facilities.

Market risk

RWAs decreased by $7bn mainly due to reductions in sovereign and flow credit portfolio exposures.

Operational risk

RWAs increased by $1.7bn primarily due to increased contributions from Retail Banking and Wealth Management ('RBWM') and Commercial Banking ('CMB') reflecting income growth in those businesses between 2016 and 2019, partly offset by a $0.9bn fall in RWAs caused by an approved change to operational risk methodology.

Table 11: RWA flow statements of credit risk exposures under the IRB approach¹ (CR8)

 

 

RWAs

Capital

required

 

 

$bn

$bn

1

At 1 Oct 2019

507.3

 

40.6

 

2

Asset size

(11.8

)

(0.9

)

3

Asset quality

(2.2

)

(0.2

)

4

Model updates

(3.1

)

(0.2

)

5

Methodology and policy

(6.0

)

(0.5

)

7

Foreign exchange movements

14.0

 

1.1

 

9

At 31 Dec 2019

498.2

 

39.9

 

1 Securitisation positions are not included in this table.

RWAs under the IRB approach decreased by $9.1bn in the fourth quarter of the year, including an increase of $14.0bn due to foreign currency translation differences. The remaining decrease of $23.1bn (excluding foreign currency translation differences) was principally due to:

• an $11.8bn asset size reduction in RWAs largely due to active portfolio management;

• a $6.0bn fall in RWAs due to methodology and policy changes - reflecting securitisation transactions, risk parameter refinements and improved collateral recognition; and

• a $3.1bn decrease in RWAs from model updates, mainly to our global corporate model.

 

Table 12: RWA flow statements of CCR exposures under IMM (CCR7)

 

 

RWAs

Capital

required

 

 

$bn

$bn

1

At 1 Oct 2019

25.0

 

2.0

 

2

Asset size

(2.7

)

(0.3

)

3

Asset quality

(0.1

)

-

 

4

Model updates

(0.1

)

-

 

5

Methodology and policy

(0.3

)

-

 

9

At 31 Dec 2019

21.8

 

1.7

 

RWAs under the IMM decreased by $3.2bn primarily due to management initiatives, including hedging and parameter refinements, and lower derivative exposure.

Table 13: RWA flow statements of market risk exposures under IMA (MR2-B)

 

 

VaR

StressedVaR

IRC

Other

TotalRWAs

Total capital required

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

At 1 Oct 2019

6.0

 

8.6

 

10.6

 

3.6

 

28.8

 

2.3

 

2

Movement in risk levels

(0.6

)

(0.5

)

(4.0

)

(0.7

)

(5.8

)

(0.4

)

4

Methodology and policy

(0.1

)

(0.1

)

-

 

(0.7

)

(0.9

)

(0.1

)

8

At 31 Dec 2019

5.3

 

8.0

 

6.6

 

2.2

 

22.1

 

1.8

 

RWAs under the IMA decreased by $6.7bn mainly due to reductions in sovereign and flow credit portfolio exposures.

Minimum requirement for own funds and

eligible liabilities

Overview and requirements

From 1 January 2019, a requirement for total loss-absorbing capacity ('TLAC') was introduced, as defined in the final standards adopted by the Financial Stability Board. In the EU, TLAC requirements were implemented via CRR II, which came into force in June 2019 and includes a new framework on minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities ('MREL').

MREL includes own funds and liabilities that can be written down or converted into capital resources in order to absorb losses or recapitalise a bank in the event of its failure. The new framework is complemented with new disclosure requirements. As the specific EU format for disclosure is yet to be agreed, the disclosures are based on the formats provided in the Basel Standards for Pillar 3 disclosures requirements.

The preferred resolution strategy for the Group, as confirmed by the BoE, is a multiple point of entry ('MPE') strategy - allowing

 

each individual resolution group to be resolved by its respective local resolution authority. Aligned with this strategy, the Group issues TLAC to the market from HSBC Holdings only, and then downstreams the proceeds to its subsidiaries as necessary and in accordance with requirements set by our regulators. This approach gives host authorities the option to recapitalise local subsidiaries through the write-down of internal TLAC resources, with the BoE applying bail-in powers at the HSBC Holdings level where necessary, and subsequently conducting any necessary restructuring and separation of the Group in coordination with host authorities.

In line with the existing structure and business model of the Group, we have three resolution groups - namely the European resolution group, the Asian resolution group and the US resolution group. There are some smaller entities that fall outside of the resolution groups, and can be separately resolved.

The table below lists the resolution groups, the related resolution entities and their material subsidiaries subject to TLAC requirements as currently agreed with the BoE.

Resolution structure

 

 

 

 

European resolution group

HSBC Holdings plc

HSBC UK Holdings Limited

 

HSBC Bank plc

 

HSBC UK Bank plc

 

HSBC France

 

Asian resolution group

HSBC Asia Holdings Limited

The Hongkong and Shanghai Banking Corporation Limited

 

Hang Seng Bank Limited

 

US resolution group

HSBC North America Holdings Inc

N/A

 

 

The external MREL requirement for the Group as a whole is currently the highest of:

• 16% of the Group's consolidated RWAs;

• 6% of the Group's consolidated leverage exposure; and

• the sum of all loss-absorbing capacity requirements and other capital requirements relating to Group entities or sub-groups.

We expect the indicative, external MREL requirements applying to the Group from 2020 to 2021 to follow the same calibration. The indicative, external MREL requirement applicable in 2022 is expected to be the highest of:

• 18% of the Group's consolidated RWAs;

• 6.75% of the Group's consolidated leverage exposure; and

• the sum of all loss-absorbing capacity requirements and other capital requirements relating to other Group entities or sub-groups.

These indicative requirements remain subject to the BoE's confirmation and its review of the MREL framework in 2020.

Further details of our approach to capital management may be found in 'Capital management' on page 152 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

  

Key metrics of the resolution groups

The table below provides a summary of key prudential metrics of the European, Asian and US resolution groups.

Table 14: Key metrics of the resolution groups (KM2)

 

 

Resolution groups

 

 

European1

 

Asian2

 

US3

 

 

At

31 Dec 2019

At

30 Sep 2019

At

30 Jun 2019

 

At

31 Dec 2019

At

30 Sep 2019

At

30 Jun 2019

 

At

31 Dec 2019

At

30 Sep 2019

At

30 Jun 2019

1

Total loss absorbing capacity ('TLAC') available ($m)

94,583

 

95,474

 

97,256

 

 

98,753

 

97,244

 

97,040

 

 

29,843

 

30,184

 

31,739

 

1a

Fully loaded ECL accounting model TLAC

available ($m)

94,439

 

95,282

 

97,055

 

 

98,753

 

97,244

 

97,040

 

 

N/A

N/A

N/A

2

Total RWA at the level of the resolution group ($m)

297,431

 

316,766

 

321,149

 

 

366,076

 

370,590

 

371,100

 

 

128,705

 

139,016

 

140,762

 

3

TLAC as a percentage of RWA (row1/row2) (%)

31.8

 

30.1

 

30.3

 

 

27.0

 

26.2

 

26.1

 

 

23.2

 

21.7

 

22.5

 

3a

Fully loaded ECL accounting model TLAC as a percentage of fully loaded ECL accounting model RWA (%)

31.8

 

30.1

 

30.2

 

 

27.0

 

26.2

 

26.1

 

 

N/A

N/A

N/A

4

Leverage exposure measure at the level of the resolution group ($m)

1,166,576

 

1,132,679

 

1,176,134

 

 

1,036,243

 

1,024,554

 

1,041,168

 

 

331,869

 

372,556

 

362,621

 

5

TLAC as a percentage of leverage exposure measure (row1/row4) (%)

8.1

 

8.4

 

8.3

 

 

9.5

 

9.5

 

9.3

 

 

9.0

 

8.1

 

8.8

 

5a

Fully loaded ECL accounting model TLAC as a percentage of fully loaded ECL accounting model Leverage exposure measure (%)

8.1

 

8.4

 

8.3

 

 

9.5

 

9.5

 

9.3

 

 

N/A

N/A

N/A

6a

Does the subordination exemption in the antepenultimate paragraph of Section 11 of the FSB TLAC Term Sheet apply?

 No

No

No

 

No

No

No

 

No

No

No

6b

Does the subordination exemption in the penultimate paragraph of Section 11 of the FSB TLAC Term Sheet apply?

 No

No

No

 

No

No

No

 

No

No

No

6c

If the capped subordination exemption applies, the amount of funding issued that ranks pari passu with excluded liabilities and that is recognised as external TLAC, divided by funding issued that ranks pari passu with excluded liabilities and that would be recognised as external TLAC if no cap was applied (%)

 N/A

N/A

N/A

 

N/A

N/A

N/A

 

N/A

N/A

N/A

1 The European resolution group reports in accordance with CRR II. Unless otherwise stated, all figures are calculated using the EU's regulatory transitional arrangements for IFRS 9 in article 473a of the Capital Requirements Regulation.

2 Reporting for the Asian resolution group follows the Hong Kong Monetary Authority ('HKMA') regulatory rules. IFRS 9 has been implemented but no regulatory transitional arrangements apply.

3 Reporting for the US resolution group is prepared in accordance with local regulatory rules. The US accounting standard for current expected credit losses ('CECL') corresponding to IFRS 9 is not yet effective. Leverage exposure and ratio are calculated under the US supplementary leverage ratio rules.

Given the preferred MPE resolution strategy, and the fact that the BoE framework includes requirements set on the basis of HSBC group consolidated position, the following table presents data for both the consolidated Group and the resolution groups. The difference between Group CET1 and the aggregate of resolution groups' CET1 is driven by entities that fall outside of the resolution groups and by differences in regulatory frameworks.

 

Table 15: TLAC composition (TLAC1)

 

 

 

 

At 31 Dec 2019

 

 

 

At 30 June 2019

 

 

Group1

 

Resolution group

 

Group1

 

Resolution group

 

 

European1

Asian2

US3

 

European1

Asian2

US3

 

Regulatory capital elements of TLAC and adjustments ($m)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Common equity tier 1 capital before adjustments

123,966

 

110,263

63,156

16,753

 

126,949

 

116,222

61,561

18,649

 

Deduction of CET1 exposures between MPE resolution groups and other group entities

-

 

 

100,028

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

 

102,699

-

 

-

 

1

Common equity tier 1 capital ('CET1')

123,966

 

10,235

63,156

16,753

 

126,949

 

13,523

61,561

18,649

2

Additional tier 1 capital ('AT1') before TLAC adjustments

24,393

 

23,515

5,855

2,240

 

25,878

 

25,089

5,837

2,240

4

Other adjustments

-

 

 

6,673

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

 

7,940

-

 

-

 

5

AT1 instruments eligible under the TLAC framework (row 2 minus row 3 minus row 4)

24,393

 

16,842

5,855

2,240

 

25,878

 

17,149

5,837

2,240

6

Tier 2 capital ('T2') before TLAC adjustments

23,791

 

24,957

7,892

4,643

 

25,432

 

25,167

8,074

5,503

7

Amortised portion of T2 instruments where remaining maturity > 1 year

579

 

579

-

 

-

 

 

1,257

 

302

-

 

-

 

8

T2 capital ineligible as TLAC as issued out of subsidiaries to third parties

-

 

 

-

 

400

 

-

 

 

-

 

 

-

 

400

 

-

 

9

Other adjustments

164

 

 

8,087

-

 

1,793

 

-

 

 

7,947

-

 

2,653

10

T2 instruments eligible under the TLAC framework (row 6 plus row 7 minus row 8 minus row 9)

24,206

 

17,449

7,492

2,850

 

26,689

 

17,522

7,674

2,850

11

TLAC arising from regulatory capital

172,566

 

44,526

76,503

21,843

 

179,516

 

48,194

75,072

23,739

 

Non-regulatory capital elements of TLAC ($m)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

12

External TLAC instruments issued directly by the bank and subordinated to excluded liabilities

81,192

 

50,057

22,257

8,000

 

80,046

 

49,062

21,970

8,000

17

TLAC arising from non-regulatory capital instruments before adjustments

81,192

 

50,057

22,257

 

8,000

 

 

80,046

 

49,062

21,970

 

8,000

 

 

Non-regulatory capital elements of TLAC: adjustments ($m)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

18

TLAC before deductions

253,757

 

94,583

98,760

 

29,843

 

 

259,562

 

97,256

97,042

 

31,739

 

19

Deductions of exposures between MPE resolution groups that correspond to items eligible for TLAC

-

 

 

-

 

7

 

-

 

 

-

 

 

-

 

2

 

-

 

20

Deduction of investments in own other TLAC liabilities

80

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

43

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

21

Other adjustments to TLAC

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

22

TLAC after deductions (row 18 minus row 19 minus row 20 minus row 21)

253,677

 

94,583

98,753

29,843

 

 

259,519

 

97,256

97,040

31,739

 

 

Risk-weighted assets and leverage exposure measure for TLAC purposes ($m)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

23

Total risk-weighted assets

843,395

 

297,431

366,076

128,705

 

 

885,971

 

321,149

371,100

140,762

 

24

Leverage exposure measure

2,726,542

 

1,166,576

1,036,243

331,869

 

 

2,786,468

 

1,176,134

1,041,168

362,621

 

 

TLAC ratios and buffers (%)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

25

TLAC (as a percentage of risk-weighted assets)

30.1%

 

31.8%

27.0%

23.2%

 

29.3%

 

30.3%

26.1%

22.5%

26

TLAC (as a percentage of leverage exposure)

9.3%

 

8.1%

9.5%

9.0%

 

9.3%

 

8.3%

9.3%

8.8%

27

CET1 (as a percentage of risk-weighted assets) available after meeting the resolution group's minimum capital and TLAC requirements4

8.5%

 

N/A

N/A

5.2%

 

8.1%

 

N/A

N/A

4.5%

28

Institution-specific buffer requirement expressed as a percentage of risk-weighted assets

5.1%

 

N/A

N/A

2.5%

 

5.2%

 

N/A

N/A

2.5%

29

- of which: capital conservation buffer requirement

2.5%

 

N/A

N/A

2.5%

 

2.5%

 

N/A

N/A

2.5%

30

- of which: bank specific countercyclical buffer requirement

0.6%

 

N/A

N/A

N/A

 

0.7%

 

N/A

N/A

N/A

31

- of which: higher loss absorbency (G-SIB) requirement

2.0%

 

N/A

N/A

N/A

 

2.0%

 

N/A

N/A

N/A

1 The Group and European resolution group reports in accordance with CRR II. Unless otherwise stated all figures are calculated using the EU's regulatory transitional arrangements for IFRS 9 in article 473a. Investments by the European resolution group in the regulatory capital or TLAC of other group companies are deducted from the corresponding form of capital in rows 1, 4 & 9. Buffer requirements are reported as 'Not applicable' as none have yet been set for the European resolution group.

2 Reporting for the Asian resolution group follows HKMA regulatory rules. IFRS 9 has been implemented but no regulatory transitional arrangements apply.

3 Reporting for the US resolution group is prepared in accordance with local regulatory rules. The US accounting standard for current expected credit losses ('CECL') corresponding to IFRS 9 is not yet effective. Leverage exposure and ratio are calculated under the US supplementary leverage ratio rules. Other adjustments for the US resolution group relate to allowances for loan and lease losses that are not TLAC eligible and Tier 2 instruments that currently do not qualify as TLAC. Under the US Final TLAC rules, in addition to the risk-weighted assets component of the TLAC requirement, the US resolution group is subject to an external 2.5% TLAC buffer that is similar to the capital conservation buffer.

4 For the Group, minimum capital requirement is defined as the sum of Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A capital requirements set by the PRA. The minimum requirements represent the total capital requirement to be met by CET1.

Creditor ranking at legal entity level

The following tables present information regarding the ranking of creditors in the liability structure of legal entities at 31 December 2019. The tables present the ranking of creditors of HSBC Holdings plc, its resolution entities, and their material sub-group entities. Nominal values are disclosed.

The main features of capital instruments disclosure for the Group, Asia and US resolution groups is published on our website, https://www.hsbc.com/investors/fixed-income-investors/regulatory-capital-securities.

European resolution group

The European resolution group comprises HSBC Holdings plc, the designated resolution entity, together with its material operating entities - namely HSBC Bank plc and its subsidiaries, and HSBC UK Bank plc and its subsidiaries. The following tables present information regarding the ranking of creditors of HSBC Holdings plc, HSBC Bank plc and HSBC UK Bank plc.

 

Table 16: HSBC Holdings plc creditor ranking (TLAC3)

 

 

 

Creditor ranking ($m)

Sum of1 to 4

 

 

 

1

 

2

 

3

4

 

 

 

 

(most junior)

 

 

(most senior)

1

Description of creditor ranking

Footnotes

Ordinary shares1

Preference shares and AT1 instruments

Subordinated notes

Senior notes and other pari passu liabilities

 

2

Total capital and liabilities net of credit risk mitigation

 

10,319

 

23,633

 

20,816

 

82,234

 

137,002

 

3

- of row 2 that are excluded liabilities

2

-

 

-

 

-

 

412

 

412

 

4

Total capital and liabilities less excluded liabilities (row 2 minus row 3)

 

10,319

 

23,633

 

20,816

 

81,822

 

136,590

 

5

- of row 4 that are potentially eligible as TLAC

 

10,319

 

23,633

 

20,816

 

80,031

 

134,799

 

6

- of row 5 with 1 year ≤ residual maturity < 2 years

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

15,658

 

15,658

 

7

- of row 5 with 2 years ≤ residual maturity < 5 years

 

-

 

-

 

2,000

 

30,341

 

32,341

 

8

- of row 5 with 5 years ≤ residual maturity < 10 years

 

-

 

-

 

7,525

 

27,290

 

34,815

 

9

- of row 5 with residual maturity ≥ 10 years, but excluding perpetual securities

 

-

 

-

 

10,391

 

6,742

 

17,133

 

10

- of row 5 that are perpetual securities

 

10,319

 

23,633

 

900

 

-

 

34,852

 

1 Excludes the value of share premium and reserves attributable to ordinary shareholders.

2 Excluded liabilities are defined in CRR II Article 72a (2). The balance mainly relates to accruals for service company recharges.

Table 17: HSBC UK Bank plc creditor ranking (TLAC2) 

 

 

 

Creditor ranking ($m)

Sum of1 to 4

 

 

 

1

 

2

 

3

 

4

 

 

 

Footnotes

(most junior)

 

 

(most senior)

1

Is the resolution entity the creditor/investor?

1

 No

 No

 No

 No

 

2

Description of creditor ranking

 

Ordinary shares2

AT1 instruments

Subordinated loans

Senior subordinated loans

 

3

Total capital and liabilities net of credit risk mitigation

 

-

 

2,903

 

3,881

 

8,619

 

15,403

 

4

- of row 3 that are excluded liabilities

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

5

Total capital and liabilities less excluded liabilities (row 3 minus row 4)

 

-

 

2,903

 

3,881

 

8,619

 

15,403

 

6

- of row 5 that are eligible as TLAC

 

-

 

2,903

 

3,881

 

8,619

 

15,403

 

7

- of row 6 with 1 year ≤ residual maturity < 2 years

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

8

- of row 6 with 2 years ≤ residual maturity < 5 years

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

9

- of row 6 with 5 years ≤ residual maturity < 10 years

 

-

 

-

 

1,700

 

4,627

 

6,327

 

10

- of row 6 with residual maturity ≥ 10 years, but excluding perpetual securities

 

-

 

-

 

2,181

 

3,992

 

6,173

 

11

- of row 6 that are perpetual securities

 

-

 

2,903

 

-

 

-

 

2,903

 

1 The entity's capital and TLAC are owned by HSBC UK Holdings Limited.

2 The nominal value of ordinary shares is £50,002. This excludes the value of share premium and reserves attributable to ordinary shareholders.

Table 18: HSBC Bank plc creditor ranking (TLAC2) 

 

 

 

Creditor ranking ($m)

Sum of1 to 4

 

 

 

1

 

2

 

3

 

4

 

 

 

Footnotes

(most junior)

 

 

(most senior)

1

Is the resolution entity the creditor/investor?

1

No

No

No

No

 

2

Description of creditor ranking

 

Ordinary shares2

Third Dollar preference shares and AT1 instruments

Undated primary capital notes

Subordinated notes and subordinated loans

 

3

Total capital and liabilities net of credit risk mitigation

 

1,054

 

5,203

 

1,550

 

18,381

 

26,188

 

4

- of row 3 that are excluded liabilities

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

5

Total capital and liabilities less excluded liabilities (row 3 minus row 4)

 

1,054

 

5,203

 

1,550

 

18,381

 

26,188

 

6

- of row 5 that are eligible as TLAC

 

1,054

 

5,203

 

1,550

 

18,381

 

26,188

 

7

- of row 6 with 1 year ≤ residual maturity < 2 years

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

450

 

450

 

8

- of row 6 with 2 years ≤ residual maturity < 5 years

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

11,003

 

11,003

 

9

- of row 6 with 5 years ≤ residual maturity < 10 years

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

3,391

 

3,391

 

10

- of row 6 with residual maturity ≥ 10 years, but excluding perpetual securities

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2,215

 

2,215

 

11

- of row 6 that are perpetual securities

 

1,054

 

5,203

 

1,550

 

1,322

 

9,129

 

1 The entity's ordinary shares are owned by HSBC UK Holdings Limited. Other instruments are either owned by HSBC UK Holdings Limited or by third parties.

2 Excludes the value of share premium and reserves attributable to ordinary shareholders.

Asian resolution group

The Asian resolution group comprises HSBC Asia Holdings Ltd, The Hongkong & Shanghai Banking Corporation Limited, Hang Seng Bank Limited and their subsidiaries. HSBC Asia Holdings Ltd

is the designated resolution entity. The following table presents information regarding the ranking of creditors of HSBC Asia Holdings Limited.

 

Table 19: HSBC Asia Holdings Ltd creditor ranking¹ (TLAC3)

 

 

 

Creditor ranking ($m)

Sum of1 to 4

 

 

1

 

2

 

3

4

 

 

 

(most junior)

 

 

(most senior)

1

Description of creditor ranking

Ordinary shares2

AT1 instruments 

Tier 2 instruments  

LAC loans

 

2

Total capital and liabilities net of credit risk mitigation

56,587

 

5,700

 

1,780

 

21,177

 

85,244

 

3

- of row 2 that are excluded liabilities

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

4

Total capital and liabilities less excluded liabilities (row 2 minus row 3)

56,587

 

5,700

 

1,780

 

21,177

 

85,244

 

5

- of row 4 that are potentially eligible as TLAC

56,587

 

5,700

 

1,780

 

21,177

 

85,244

 

6

- of row 5 with 1 year ≤ residual maturity < 2 years

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

7

- of row 5 with 2 years ≤ residual maturity < 5 years

-

 

-

 

-

 

9,828

 

9,828

 

8

- of row 5 with 5 years ≤ residual maturity < 10 years

-

 

-

 

-

 

9,349

 

9,349

 

9

- of row 5 with residual maturity ≥ 10 years, but excluding perpetual securities

-

 

-

 

1,780

 

2,000

 

3,780

 

10

- of row 5 that are perpetual securities

56,587

 

5,700

 

-

 

-

 

62,287

 

1 The entity's capital and TLAC are held by HSBC Holdings plc.

2 Excludes the value of share premium and reserves attributable to ordinary shareholders.

Table 20: The Hongkong and Shanghai Banking Corporation Ltd creditor ranking (TLAC2) 

 

 

Creditor ranking ($m)

Sum of1 to 5

 

 

1

 

2

 

3

 

4

 

5

 

 

 

(most junior)

 

 

 

(most senior)

1

Is the resolution entity the creditor/investor?

Yes

Yes

No1

Yes

Yes

 

2

Description of creditor ranking

Ordinary shares2

AT1 instruments

Primary capital notes

Tier 2 instruments

LAC loans

 

3

Total capital and liabilities net of credit risk mitigation

22,125

 

5,700

 

400

 

1,780

 

21,177

 

51,182

 

4

- of row 3 that are excluded liabilities

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

5

Total capital and liabilities less excluded liabilities (row 3 minus row 4)

22,125

 

5,700

 

400

 

1,780

 

21,177

 

51,182

 

6

- of row 5 that are eligible as TLAC

22,125

 

5,700

 

-

 

1,780

 

21,177

 

50,782

 

7

- of row 6 with 1 year ≤ residual maturity < 2 years

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

8

- of row 6 with 2 years ≤ residual maturity < 5 years

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

9,828

 

9,828

 

9

- of row 6 with 5 years ≤ residual maturity < 10 years

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

9,349

 

9,349

 

10

- of row 6 with residual maturity ≥ 10 years, but excluding perpetual securities

-

 

-

 

-

 

1,780

 

2,000

 

3,780

 

11

- of row 6 that are perpetual securities

22,125

 

5,700

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

27,825

 

1 The company's primary capital notes are held by third parties.

2 Excludes the value of share premium and reserves attributable to ordinary shareholders.

 

Table 21: Hang Seng Bank Ltd creditor ranking (TLAC2) 

 

 

 

 

Creditor ranking ($m)

Sum of1 to 3

 

 

 

1

 

2

 

3

 

 

 

Footnotes

(most junior)

 

(most senior)

1

Is the resolution entity the creditor/investor?

1

No

No

No

 

2

Description of creditor ranking

 

Ordinary shares2

AT1 instruments

LAC loans

 

3

Total capital and liabilities net of credit risk mitigation

 

1,240

 

1,500

 

2,503

 

5,243

 

4

- of row 3 that are excluded liabilities

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

5

Total capital and liabilities less excluded liabilities (row 3 minus row 4)

 

1,240

 

1,500

 

2,503

 

5,243

 

6

- of row 5 that are eligible as TLAC

 

1,240

 

1,500

 

2,503

 

5,243

 

7

- of row 6 with 1 year ≤ residual maturity < 2 years

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

8

- of row 6 with 2 years ≤ residual maturity < 5 years

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

9

- of row 6 with 5 years ≤ residual maturity < 10 years

 

-

 

-

 

2,103

 

2,103

 

10

- of row 6 with residual maturity ≥ 10 years, but excluding perpetual securities

 

-

 

-

 

400

 

400

 

11

- of row 6 that are perpetual securities

 

1,240

 

1,500

 

-

 

2,740

 

1 62.14% of Hang Seng Bank Limited's ordinary share capital is owned by The Hongkong and Shanghai Banking Corporation Limited. Hang Seng Bank Limited's other TLAC eligible securities are directly held by The Hongkong and Shanghai Banking Corporation Limited.

2 Excludes the value of reserves attributable to ordinary shareholders.

US resolution group

The US resolution group comprises HSBC North America Holdings Inc. and its subsidiaries. HSBC North America Holdings Inc. is the designated resolution entity.

The following table presents information regarding the ranking of creditors of HSBC North America Holdings Inc.

 

Table 22: HSBC North America Holdings Inc. creditor ranking¹ (TLAC3)

 

 

 

 

Creditor ranking ($m)

Sum of1 to 4

 

 

 

1

 

2

 

3

4

 

 

 

 

(most junior)

 

 

(most senior)

1

Description of creditor ranking

Footnotes

Common stock2

Preferred stock

Subordinated loans

Senior unsecured loans and other pari passu liabilities

 

2

Total capital and liabilities net of credit risk mitigation

 

-

 

2,240

 

2,850

 

8,333

 

13,423

 

3

- of row 2 that are excluded liabilities

3

-

 

-

 

-

 

183

 

183

 

4

Total capital and liabilities less excluded liabilities (row 2 minus row 3)

 

-

 

2,240

 

2,850

 

8,150

 

13,240

 

5

- of row 4 that are potentially eligible as TLAC

 

-

 

2,240

 

2,850

 

8,000

 

13,090

 

6

- of row 5 with 1 year ≤ residual maturity < 2 years

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

7

- of row 5 with 2 years ≤ residual maturity < 5 years

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

3,500

 

3,500

 

8

- of row 5 with 5 years ≤ residual maturity < 10 years

 

-

 

-

 

2,850

 

4,500

 

7,350

 

9

- of row 5 with residual maturity ≥ 10 years, but excluding perpetual

securities

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

10

- of row 5 that are perpetual securities

 

-

 

2,240

 

-

 

-

 

2,240

 

1 The entity's capital and TLAC are held by HSBC Overseas Holdings (UK) Limited.

2 The nominal value of common stock is $2. This excludes the value of share premium and reserves attributable to ordinary shareholders.

3 Excluded liabilities consists of 'unrelated liabilities' as defined in the Final US TLAC rules. This mainly represents accrued employee benefit obligations.

Pillar 2 and ICAAP

Pillar 2

We conduct an Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process ('ICAAP') to determine a forward-looking assessment of our capital requirements given our business strategy, risk profile, risk appetite and capital plan. This process incorporates the Group's risk management processes and governance framework. Our base capital plan undergoes stress testing. This, coupled with our economic capital framework and other risk management practices, is used to assess our internal capital adequacy requirements and inform our view of our internal capital planning buffer. The ICAAP is formally approved by the Board, which has the ultimate responsibility for the effective management of risk and approval of HSBC's risk appetite.

The ICAAP is reviewed by the PRA and by a college of supervisors, as part of the joint risk assessment and decision process, during the Supervisory Review and Evaluation Process. This process occurs periodically to enable the regulator to define the individual capital requirement ('ICR') (previously known as the individual capital guidance ('ICG')) or minimum capital requirements for HSBC and to define the PRA buffer, where required. Under the revised Pillar 2 PRA regime, which came into effect from 1 January 2017, the capital planning buffer has been replaced with a 'PRA buffer'. This is not intended to duplicate the CRD IV buffers and, where necessary, will be set according to vulnerability in a stress scenario, as identified and assessed through the annual PRA stress testing exercise.

The processes of internal capital adequacy assessment and supervisory review lead to a final determination by the PRA of the ICR and any PRA buffer that may be required.

Pillar 2 comprises Pillar 2A and Pillar 2B. Pillar 2A considers, in addition to the minimum capital requirements for Pillar 1 risks described above, any supplementary requirements for those risks and any requirements for risk categories not captured by Pillar 1. The risk categories covered under Pillar 2A depend on the specific circumstances of a firm and the nature and scale of its business.

Pillar 2B consists of guidance from the PRA on the capital buffer a firm would require in order to remain above its ICR in adverse circumstances that may be largely outside the firm's normal and direct control; for example, during a period of severe but plausible downturn stress, when asset values and the firm's capital surplus may become strained. This is quantified via any PRA buffer requirement the PRA may consider necessary. The assessment of this is informed by stress tests and a rounded judgement of a firm's business model, also taking into account the PRA's view of a firm's options and capacity to protect its capital position under stress; for instance, through capital generation. Where the PRA assesses that a firm's risk management and governance are significantly weak, it may also increase the PRA buffer to cover the risks posed by those weaknesses until they are addressed. The PRA buffer is intended to be drawn upon in times of stress, and its use is not of itself a breach of capital requirements that would trigger automatic restrictions on distributions. In specific circumstances, the PRA should agree a plan with a firm for its restoration over an agreed timescale.

Internal capital adequacy assessment

The Board manages the Group ICAAP and, together with RMM and GRC, it examines the Group's risk profile from both a regulatory and economic capital viewpoint. They aim to ensure that capital resources:

• remain sufficient to support our risk profile and outstanding commitments;

• meet current regulatory requirements, and that HSBC is well placed to meet those expected in the future;

• allow the group to remain adequately capitalised in the event of a severe economic downturn stress scenario; and

• remain consistent with our strategic and operational goals, and our shareholder and investor expectations.

The minimum regulatory capital that we are required to hold is determined by the rules and guidance established by the PRA for the consolidated Group and by local regulators for individual Group companies. These capital requirements are a primary factor in influencing and shaping the business planning process, in which RWA targets are established for our global businesses in accordance with the Group's strategic direction and risk appetite.

Economic capital is the internally calculated capital requirement that we deem necessary to support the risks to which we are exposed. The economic capital assessment is a more risk-sensitive measure than the regulatory minimum, and takes account of the substantial diversification of risk accruing from our operations. Both the regulatory and the economic capital assessments rely upon the use of models that are integrated into our risk management processes. Our economic capital models are calibrated to quantify the level of capital that is sufficient to absorb potential losses over a one-year time horizon to a 99.95% level of confidence for our banking and trading activities, to a 99.5% level of confidence for our insurance activities and pension risks, and to a 99.9% level of confidence for our operational risks.

The ICAAP and its constituent economic capital calculations are examined by the PRA as part of its Supervisory Review and Evaluation Process. This examination informs the regulator's view of our Pillar 2 capital requirements.

Preserving our strong capital position remains a priority, and the level of integration of our risk and capital management helps to optimise our response to business demand for regulatory and economic capital. Risks that are explicitly assessed through economic capital are credit risk (including CCR), market risk, operational risk, interest rate risk in the banking book ('IRRBB'), insurance risk, pension risk and structural foreign exchange risk.

Credit risk

Overview and responsibilities

Credit risk represents our largest regulatory capital requirement.

The principal objectives of our credit risk management function are:

to maintain across HSBC a strong culture of responsible lending and a robust credit risk policy and control framework;

to both partner and challenge our businesses in defining, implementing and continually re-evaluating our credit risk appetite under actual and stress scenario conditions; and

to ensure there is independent, expert scrutiny of credit risks, their costs and their mitigation.

The credit risk functions within Wholesale Credit and Market Risk and RBWM are the constituent parts of Global Risk that support the Group CRO in overseeing credit risks. Their major duties comprise undertaking independent reviews of large and high-risk credit proposals, overseeing large exposure policy and reporting on our wholesale and retail credit risk management disciplines. They also own our credit policy and credit systems programmes, oversee portfolio management and report on risk matters to senior executive management and regulators.

These credit risk functions work closely with other parts of Global Risk; for example, with Operational Risk on the internal control framework and with Risk Strategy on the risk appetite process. In addition, they work jointly with Risk Strategy and Global Finance on stress testing.

The credit responsibilities of Global Risk are described on page 75 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

Group-wide, the credit risk functions comprise a network of credit risk management offices reporting within regional risk functions. They fulfil an essential role as independent risk control units distinct from business line management in providing objective scrutiny of risk rating assessments, credit proposals for approval and other risk matters.

Our credit risk procedures operate through a hierarchy of personal credit limit approval authorities. Operating company chief executives, acting under authorities delegated by their boards and Group standards, are accountable for credit risk and other risks in their business. In turn, chief executives delegate authority to operating company chief risk officers and management teams on an individual basis. Each operating company is responsible for the quality and performance of its credit portfolios in accordance with Group standards. Above these thresholds of delegated personal credit limited approval authorities, approval must be sought from the regional and, as appropriate, the global credit risk function.

Credit risk management

Our exposure to credit risk arises from a wide range of customer and products, and the risk rating systems in place to measure and monitor these risks are correspondingly diverse. Senior management receives a variety of reports on our credit risk exposures, including expected credit losses, total exposures and RWAs, as well as updates on specific portfolios that are considered to have heightened credit risk.

Credit risk exposures are generally measured and managed in portfolios of either customer types or product categories. Risk rating systems are designed to assess the default propensity of, and loss severity associated with, distinct customers who are typically managed as individual relationships or, in the case of retail business exposures, on a product portfolio basis.

Risk rating systems for retail exposures are generally quantitative in nature, applying techniques such as behavioural analysis across product portfolios comprising large numbers of homogeneous transactions. Rating systems for individually managed relationships typically use customer financial statements and market data analysis, but also qualitative elements and a final subjective overlay to better reflect any idiosyncratic elements of the customer's risk profile.

See 'Application of the IRB Approach' on page 44 for more information.

A fundamental principle of our policy and approach is that analytical risk rating systems and scorecards are all valuable tools at the disposal of management.

The credit process provides for at least an annual review of facility limits granted. Review may be more frequent, as required by circumstances such as the emergence of adverse risk factors.

We constantly seek to improve the quality of our risk management. Group IT systems that process credit risk data continue to be enhanced in order to deliver both comprehensive management information in support of business strategy and solutions to evolving regulatory reporting requirements.

Group standards govern the process through which risk rating systems are initially developed, judged fit for purpose, approved and implemented. They also govern the conditions under which analytical risk model outcomes can be overridden by decision takers and the process of model performance monitoring and reporting. The emphasis is on an effective dialogue between business line and risk management, suitable independence of decision takers, and a good understanding and robust challenge on the part of senior management.

Like other facets of risk management, analytical risk rating systems are not static. They are subject to review and modification in light of the changing environment, the greater availability and quality of data, and any deficiencies identified through internal and external regulatory review. Structured processes and metrics are in place to capture relevant data and feed this into continuous model improvement.

See 'Model performance' on page 51 for more information.

Credit risk models governance

All new or materially changed IRB capital models require the PRA's approval, as set out in more detail on page 44. Throughout HSBC, such models fall directly under the remit of the global functional MOCs, operating in line with HSBC's model risk policy, and under the oversight of the Global MOC.

Both the Wholesale and RBWM MOCs require all credit risk models for which they are responsible to be approved by delegated senior managers with notification to the committees that retain the responsibility for oversight.

Global Risk sets internal standards for the development, validation, independent review, approval, implementation and performance monitoring of credit risk rating models. Independent reviews of our models are performed by our Independent Model Review function which is separate from our Risk Analytics functions that are responsible for the development of models.

We are designing a new target operating model for the MRM function, which sets model risk management policy, standards and model risk appetite.

Further information is available on page 146 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

Compliance with Group standards is subject to examination by Risk oversight and review from within the Risk function itself, and by Internal Audit.

Dilution risk

Dilution risk is the risk that an amount receivable is reduced through cash or non-cash credit to the obligor, and arises mainly from factoring and invoice discounting transactions.

Where there is recourse to the seller, we treat these transactions as loans secured by the collateral of the debts purchased and do not report dilution risk for them. For our non-recourse portfolio we obtain an indemnity from the seller that indemnifies us against this risk. Moreover, factoring transactions involve lending at a discount to the face-value of the receivables, which provides protection against dilution risk. 

The table below provides a summary of credit risk exposure by exposure class and approach. Further information on credit risk exposure by industry and geography can be found in the Concentration risk section on page 35.

Table 23: Credit risk exposure - summary (CRB-B)

 

 

At 31 Dec 2019

 

At 31 Dec 2018

 

 

Net carrying

values

Average

net carrying

values3

RWAs^

Capital

required

RWA density

 

Net carrying

values

Average

net carrying

values3

RWAs^

Capital

required

RWA density

 

Footnotes

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

%

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

%

IRB advanced approach

 

1,935.3

 

1,892.4

 

452.6

 

36.2

 

29

 

 

1,844.5

 

1,812.1

 

468.2

 

37.4

 

32

 

- central governments and central banks

 

346.3

 

343.9

 

36.3

 

2.9

 

11

 

 

331.7

 

315.4

 

36.9

 

3.0

 

11

 

- institutions

 

74.7

 

82.4

 

10.8

 

0.9

 

16

 

 

80.6

 

88.0

 

14.2

 

1.1

 

19

 

- corporates

1

959.9

 

958.1

 

327.7

 

26.2

 

50

 

 

948.9

 

932.0

 

345.1

 

27.5

 

52

 

- total retail

 

554.4

 

508.0

 

77.8

 

6.2

 

16

 

 

483.3

 

476.7

 

72.0

 

5.8

 

17

 

Secured by mortgages on immovable property SME

 

3.6

 

3.6

 

1.5

 

0.1

 

45

 

 

3.5

 

3.2

 

1.8

 

0.1

 

54

 

Secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME

 

314.5

 

298.9

 

40.4

 

3.2

 

13

 

 

285.9

 

280.9

 

37.2

 

3.0

 

13

 

Qualifying revolving retail

 

140.3

 

135.1

 

18.8

 

1.5

 

23

 

 

132.1

 

129.1

 

17.3

 

1.4

 

23

 

Other SME

 

7.9

 

7.8

 

4.7

 

0.4

 

76

 

 

7.5

 

8.7

 

4.8

 

0.4

 

76

 

Other non-SME

 

88.1

 

62.6

 

12.4

 

1.0

 

18

 

 

54.3

 

54.8

 

10.9

 

0.9

 

24

 

IRB securitisation positions

 

20.2

 

25.0

 

3.7

 

0.3

 

19

 

 

29.7

 

31.0

 

6.3

 

0.5

 

21

 

IRB non-credit obligation assets

 

62.4

 

60.1

 

13.3

 

1.1

 

21

 

 

56.9

 

59.2

 

10.8

 

0.9

 

19

 

IRB foundation approach

 

88.3

 

82.1

 

32.3

 

2.6

 

59

 

 

78.4

 

76.5

 

30.5

 

2.4

 

61

 

- central governments and central banks

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

20

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

25

 

- institutions

 

0.7

 

0.6

 

0.2

 

-

 

26

 

 

0.5

 

0.3

 

0.2

 

-

 

35

 

- corporates

 

87.6

 

81.5

 

32.1

 

2.6

 

59

 

 

77.9

 

76.2

 

30.3

 

2.4

 

61

 

Standardised approach

 

525.3

 

518.3

 

174.7

 

14.0

 

45

 

 

501.8

 

501.9

 

175.3

 

14.1

 

48

 

- central governments and central banks

 

176.9

 

164.5

 

11.2

 

0.9

 

6

 

 

163.9

 

182.5

 

12.5

 

1.0

 

7

 

- regional governments or local authorities

 

8.9

 

7.9

 

1.6

 

0.1

 

18

 

 

7.3

 

5.7

 

1.3

 

0.1

 

19

 

- public sector entities

 

16.6

 

14.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

12.2

 

7.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

- multilateral development banks

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

0.2

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

2

 

- international organisations

 

1.6

 

1.5

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

1.6

 

2.0

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

- institutions

 

2.4

 

2.8

 

0.9

 

0.1

 

58

 

 

3.4

 

3.0

 

1.2

 

0.1

 

52

 

- corporates

 

159.8

 

181.4

 

72.5

 

5.8

 

94

 

 

179.4

 

168.4

 

79.2

 

6.3

 

94

 

- retail

 

70.7

 

67.0

 

14.4

 

1.2

 

74

 

 

63.8

 

66.2

 

14.8

 

1.2

 

74

 

- secured by mortgages on immovable property

 

33.4

 

32.1

 

12.0

 

1.0

 

37

 

 

32.0

 

30.3

 

11.3

 

0.9

 

37

 

- exposures in default

 

3.4

 

3.1

 

4.1

 

0.3

 

114

 

 

3.0

 

3.0

 

3.8

 

0.3

 

117

 

- items associated with particularly high risk

 

5.5

 

5.3

 

7.9

 

0.6

 

150

 

 

4.8

 

4.2

 

6.9

 

0.6

 

150

 

- securitisation positions

 

16.3

 

8.1

 

4.6

 

0.4

 

28

 

 

2.7

 

2.5

 

2.1

 

0.2

 

82

 

- collective investment undertakings ('CIU')

 

0.4

 

0.5

 

0.4

 

-

 

100

 

 

0.6

 

0.6

 

0.6

 

0.1

 

100

 

- equity exposures

2

16.4

 

16.2

 

36.3

 

2.9

 

220

 

 

15.6

 

13.2

 

35.0

 

2.8

 

223

 

- other items

 

12.9

 

13.7

 

8.8

 

0.7

 

68

 

 

11.3

 

12.5

 

6.6

 

0.5

 

58

 

Total

 

2,631.5

 

2,577.9

 

676.6

 

54.2

 

33

 

 

2,511.3

 

2,480.7

 

691.1

 

55.3

 

35

 

^ Figures have been prepared on an IFRS 9 transitional basis.

1 Corporates includes specialised lending exposures which are reported in more detail in Table 75: Specialised lending on slotting approach (CR10).

2 Equity exposures include investments that are risk weighted at 250%.

3 Average net carrying values are calculated by aggregating net carrying values of the last five quarters and dividing by five.

 

Credit quality

We are a universal bank with a conservative approach to credit risk. This is reflected in our credit risk profile being diversified across a number of asset classes and geographies with a credit quality profile mainly concentrated in the higher quality bands. The following tables present information on the credit quality of exposures by exposure class, industry and geography. For further detail on the credit quality of STD exposures, refer to Table 41 and 74. Information on the credit quality of IRB exposures can be found in Table 76.

Table 24: Credit quality of exposures by exposure classes and instruments¹ (CR1-A)

 

 

Gross carrying values of

Specific credit risk adjustments

 

Write-offs in the year2

Credit risk adjustment charges of the period2

Net carrying values

 

 

Defaulted exposures

Non-defaulted exposures

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Central governments and central banks

-

 

346.4

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

346.3

 

2

Institutions

-

 

75.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

75.4

 

3

Corporates

6.9

 

1,044.9

 

4.3

 

0.9

 

1.0

 

1,047.5

 

4

- of which: specialised lending

1.1

 

50.8

 

0.5

 

-

 

-

 

51.4

 

6

Retail

3.4

 

553.0

 

2.0

 

0.8

 

1.1

 

554.4

 

7

- Secured by real estate property

2.4

 

316.0

 

0.3

 

-

 

-

 

318.1

 

8

SMEs

0.1

 

3.6

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

3.6

 

9

Non-SMEs

2.3

 

312.4

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

314.5

 

10

- Qualifying revolving retail

0.3

 

141.0

 

1.0

 

0.4

 

0.6

 

140.3

 

11

- Other retail

0.7

 

96.0

 

0.7

 

0.4

 

0.5

 

96.0

 

12

SMEs

0.4

 

7.8

 

0.3

 

0.2

 

0.2

 

7.9

 

13

Non-SMEs

0.3

 

88.2

 

0.4

 

0.2

 

0.3

 

88.1

 

15

Total IRB approach

10.3

 

2,019.7

 

6.4

 

1.7

 

2.1

 

2,023.6

 

16

Central governments and central banks

-

 

176.9

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

176.9

 

17

Regional governments or local authorities

-

 

8.9

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

8.9

 

18

Public sector entities

-

 

16.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

16.6

 

19

Multilateral development banks

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

20

International organisations

-

 

1.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1.6

 

21

Institutions

-

 

2.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.4

 

22

Corporates

3.7

 

160.3

 

2.0

 

0.5

 

0.2

 

162.0

 

24

Retail

1.0

 

71.7

 

1.4

 

0.7

 

0.8

 

71.3

 

25

- of which: SMEs

-

 

1.3

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

1.2

 

26

Secured by mortgages on immovable property

0.7

 

33.5

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

34.0

 

27

- of which: SMEs

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

28

Exposures in default

5.4

 

-

 

2.0

 

1.2

 

1.0

 

3.4

 

29

Items associated with particularly high risk

0.1

 

5.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

5.5

 

32

Collective investment undertakings ('CIU')

-

 

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.4

 

33

Equity exposures

-

 

16.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

16.4

 

34

Other exposures

-

 

12.9

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

12.9

 

35

Total standardised approach

5.5

 

507.1

 

3.6

 

1.2

 

1.0

 

509.0

 

36

Total at 31 Dec 2019

15.8

 

2,526.8

 

10.0

 

2.9

 

3.1

 

2,532.6

 

 

- of which: loans

14.6

 

1,274.0

 

9.4

 

2.9

 

3.1

 

1,279.2

 

 

- of which: debt securities

-

 

377.4

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

377.3

 

 

- of which: off-balance sheet exposures

1.2

 

837.5

 

0.5

 

-

 

-

 

838.2

 

 

 

Table 24: Credit quality of exposures by exposure classes and instruments¹ (CR1-A) (continued)

 

 

Gross carrying values of

Specific credit risk adjustments

 

Write-offs in the year2

Credit risk adjustment charges of the period2

Net carrying values

 

 

Defaulted exposures

Non-defaulted exposures

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Central governments and central banks

-

 

331.8

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

331.7

 

2

Institutions

-

 

81.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

81.1

 

3

Corporates

6.9

 

1,024.0

 

4.1

 

0.8

 

0.5

 

1,026.8

 

4

- of which: specialised lending

0.8

 

49.3

 

0.4

 

-

 

0.1

 

49.7

 

6

Retail

3.3

 

481.8

 

1.8

 

0.7

 

0.9

 

483.3

 

7

- Secured by real estate property

2.5

 

287.3

 

0.4

 

-

 

0.1

 

289.4

 

8

SMEs

0.1

 

3.5

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

3.5

 

9

Non-SMEs

2.4

 

283.8

 

0.3

 

-

 

-

 

285.9

 

10

- Qualifying revolving retail

0.1

 

132.7

 

0.7

 

0.3

 

0.4

 

132.1

 

11

- Other retail

0.7

 

61.8

 

0.7

 

0.4

 

0.4

 

61.8

 

12

SMEs

0.3

 

7.5

 

0.3

 

0.2

 

0.2

 

7.5

 

13

Non-SMEs

0.4

 

54.3

 

0.4

 

0.2

 

0.2

 

54.3

 

15

Total IRB approach

10.2

 

1,918.7

 

6.0

 

1.5

 

1.4

 

1,922.9

 

16

Central governments and central banks

-

 

163.9

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

163.9

 

17

Regional governments or local authorities

-

 

7.3

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

7.3

 

18

Public sector entities

-

 

12.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

12.2

 

19

Multilateral development banks

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

20

International organisations

-

 

1.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1.6

 

21

Institutions

-

 

3.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

3.4

 

22

Corporates

3.3

 

180.0

 

2.1

 

0.3

 

0.4

 

181.2

 

24

Retail

1.1

 

64.9

 

1.5

 

0.7

 

0.5

 

64.5

 

25

- of which: SMEs

-

 

1.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1.2

 

26

Secured by mortgages on immovable property

0.6

 

32.1

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

32.5

 

27

- of which: SMEs

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

28

Exposures in default

5.1

 

-

 

2.1

 

1.0

 

0.8

 

3.0

 

29

Items associated with particularly high risk

0.1

 

4.7

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

4.8

 

32

Collective investment undertakings ('CIU')

-

 

0.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.6

 

33

Equity exposures

-

 

15.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

15.6

 

34

Other exposures

-

 

11.3

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

11.3

 

35

Total standardised approach

5.1

 

497.8

 

3.8

 

1.0

 

0.9

 

499.1

 

36

Total at 31 Dec 2018

15.3

 

2,416.5

 

9.8

 

2.5

 

2.3

 

2,422.0

 

 

- of which: loans

13.7

 

1,233.4

 

9.1

 

2.5

 

2.3

 

1,238.0

 

 

- of which: debt securities

-

 

348.5

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

348.5

 

 

- of which: off-balance sheet exposures

1.6

 

798.7

 

0.6

 

-

 

-

 

799.7

 

1 Securitisation positions and non-credit obligation assets are not included in this table.

2 Presented on a year-to-date basis.

 

 

 

Table 25: Credit quality of exposures by industry or counterparty types¹, ² (CR1-B)

 

 

 

Gross carrying values of

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Defaulted exposures

Non-defaulted exposures

Specific credit risk adjustments

 

Write-offs in the year3

Credit risk adjustment charges of the period3

Net carrying values

 

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Agriculture

 

0.3

 

9.7

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

9.8

 

2

Mining & oil extraction

 

0.4

 

41.1

 

0.3

 

-

 

-

 

41.2

 

3

Manufacturing

 

1.8

 

261.3

 

1.4

 

0.6

 

0.8

 

261.7

 

4

Utilities

 

0.2

 

32.2

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

-

 

32.3

 

5

Water supply

 

-

 

3.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

3.4

 

6

Construction

 

1.2

 

46.1

 

0.6

 

0.2

 

0.1

 

46.7

 

7

Wholesale & retail trade

 

2.1

 

204.3

 

1.3

 

0.3

 

0.3

 

205.1

 

8

Transportation & storage

 

0.4

 

44.6

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

44.8

 

9

Accommodation & food services

 

0.3

 

29.0

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

29.2

 

10

Information & communication

 

-

 

16.8

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

16.7

 

11

Financial & insurance

 

0.4

 

535.0

 

0.3

 

-

 

0.1

 

535.1

 

12

Real estate

 

1.2

 

196.0

 

0.7

 

-

 

0.1

 

196.5

 

13

Professional activities

 

0.1

 

28.0

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

28.0

 

14

Administrative service

 

2.0

 

154.9

 

0.9

 

-

 

0.1

 

156.0

 

15

Public admin & defence

 

0.2

 

214.1

 

0.2

 

-

 

(0.2

)

214.1

 

16

Education

 

-

 

3.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

3.6

 

17

Human health & social work

 

0.2

 

7.1

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

7.2

 

18

Arts & entertainment

 

-

 

7.0

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

7.0

 

19

Other services

 

0.2

 

17.6

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

17.7

 

20

Personal

 

4.8

 

631.6

 

3.3

 

1.5

 

1.6

 

633.1

 

21

Extra-territorial bodies

 

-

 

43.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

43.4

 

22

Total at 31 Dec 2019

 

15.8

 

2,526.8

 

10.0

 

2.9

 

3.1

 

2,532.6

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Agriculture

 

0.3

 

8.6

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

8.8

 

2

Mining & oil extraction

 

0.5

 

40.9

 

0.3

 

0.1

 

(0.1

)

41.1

 

3

Manufacturing

 

2.0

 

255.6

 

1.4

 

0.4

 

0.3

 

256.2

 

4

Utilities

 

0.1

 

31.5

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

31.4

 

5

Water supply

 

-

 

3.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

3.6

 

6

Construction

 

1.4

 

39.8

 

0.6

 

-

 

0.2

 

40.6

 

7

Wholesale & retail trade

 

2.2

 

203.4

 

1.3

 

0.3

 

0.4

 

204.3

 

8

Transportation & storage

 

0.4

 

45.0

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.1

 

45.2

 

9

Accommodation & food services

 

0.4

 

27.2

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

27.4

 

10

Information & communication

 

-

 

18.8

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

18.7

 

11

Financial & insurance

 

0.3

 

531.4

 

0.2

 

0.1

 

(0.1

)

531.5

 

12

Real estate

 

1.0

 

189.3

 

0.6

 

-

 

0.2

 

189.7

 

13

Professional activities

 

0.2

 

28.5

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

28.6

 

14

Administrative service

 

1.1

 

146.3

 

0.9

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

146.5

 

15

Public admin & defence

 

0.4

 

192.0

 

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

192.0

 

16

Education

 

-

 

3.5

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

3.5

 

17

Human health & social work

 

0.2

 

6.9

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

7.0

 

18

Arts & entertainment

 

-

 

8.5

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

8.5

 

19

Other services

 

0.2

 

13.0

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

13.1

 

20

Personal

 

4.6

 

572.8

 

3.0

 

1.5

 

1.0

 

574.4

 

21

Extra-territorial bodies

 

-

 

49.9

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

49.9

 

22

Total at 31 Dec 2018

 

15.3

 

2,416.5

 

9.8

 

2.5

 

2.3

 

2,422.0

 

1 Securitisation positions and non-credit obligation assets are not included in this table.

2 The industry classifications of this disclosure have been revised. 31 December 2018 data has been restated to be on a consistent basis with the current year.

3 Presented on a year-to-date basis.

 

Table 26: Credit quality of exposures by geography1 (CR1-C)

 

 

Gross carrying values of

 

 

 

 

 

 

Defaulted exposures

Non-defaulted exposures

Specific credit risk adjustments

 

Write-offs in the year2

Credit risk adjustment charges of the period2

Net carrying values

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Europe

7.1

 

811.5

 

3.8

 

1.1

 

1.2

 

814.8

 

2

- United Kingdom

4.6

 

505.5

 

2.7

 

0.8

 

1.0

 

507.4

 

3

- France

1.2

 

136.5

 

0.6

 

0.1

 

0.2

 

137.1

 

4

- Other countries

1.3

 

169.5

 

0.5

 

0.2

 

-

 

170.3

 

5

Asia

2.5

 

1,056.3

 

2.3

 

0.6

 

0.8

 

1,056.5

 

6

- Hong Kong

0.7

 

531.7

 

0.9

 

0.2

 

0.4

 

531.5

 

7

- China

0.3

 

163.3

 

0.4

 

0.1

 

0.2

 

163.2

 

8

- Singapore

0.2

 

76.5

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.1

 

76.5

 

9

- Australia

0.2

 

59.4

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

59.5

 

10

- Other countries

1.1

 

225.4

 

0.7

 

0.3

 

0.1

 

225.8

 

11

MENA

3.5

 

145.2

 

2.1

 

0.4

 

0.1

 

146.6

 

12

North America

1.9

 

439.8

 

0.7

 

0.2

 

0.3

 

441.0

 

13

- United States of America

1.2

 

311.0

 

0.4

 

0.2

 

0.2

 

311.8

 

14

- Canada

0.3

 

112.5

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.1

 

112.6

 

15

- Other countries

0.4

 

16.3

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

16.6

 

16

Latin America

0.8

 

60.3

 

1.1

 

0.6

 

0.7

 

60.0

 

17

Other geographical areas

-

 

13.7

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

13.7

 

18

Total at 31 Dec 2019

15.8

 

2,526.8

 

10.0

 

2.9

 

3.1

 

2,532.6

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Europe

6.7

 

780.1

 

3.8

 

0.9

 

1.0

 

783.0

 

2

- United Kingdom

4.1

 

474.2

 

2.4

 

0.8

 

0.9

 

475.9

 

3

- France

1.0

 

127.2

 

0.6

 

0.1

 

-

 

127.6

 

4

- Other countries

1.6

 

178.7

 

0.8

 

-

 

0.1

 

179.5

 

5

Asia

2.8

 

1,001.7

 

2.1

 

0.6

 

0.8

 

1,002.4

 

6

- Hong Kong

0.9

 

497.5

 

0.7

 

0.3

 

0.1

 

497.7

 

7

- China

0.3

 

157.3

 

0.3

 

0.1

 

0.2

 

157.3

 

8

- Singapore

0.2

 

71.9

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.1

 

71.9

 

9

- Australia

0.2

 

52.5

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

52.5

 

10

- Other countries

1.2

 

222.5

 

0.7

 

0.2

 

0.4

 

223.0

 

11

MENA

2.9

 

137.3

 

2.3

 

0.3

 

0.3

 

137.9

 

12

North America

2.0

 

419.4

 

0.6

 

0.2

 

(0.1

)

420.8

 

13

- United States of America

1.3

 

295.1

 

0.3

 

0.1

 

-

 

296.1

 

14

- Canada

0.2

 

107.5

 

0.2

 

0.1

 

-

 

107.5

 

15

- Other countries

0.5

 

16.8

 

0.1

 

-

 

(0.1

)

17.2

 

16

Latin America

0.9

 

62.9

 

1.0

 

0.5

 

0.3

 

62.8

 

17

Other geographical areas

-

 

15.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

15.1

 

18

Total at 31 Dec 2018

15.3

 

2,416.5

 

9.8

 

2.5

 

2.3

 

2,422.0

 

1 Amounts shown by geographical region and country/territory in this table are based on the country/territory of residence of the counterparty. Securitisation positions and non-credit obligation assets are not included in this table.

2 Presented on a year-to-date basis.

 

Table 27: Changes in stock of general and specific credit risk adjustments (CR2-A)

 

 

 

Twelve months to 31 Dec

 

 

 

2019

2018

 

 

 

Accumulated specific credit risk adjustments

Accumulated general

credit risk adjustments

Accumulated specific

credit risk adjustments

Accumulated general

credit risk adjustments

 

 

Footnotes

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Opening balance at the beginning of the period

 

9.8

 

-

 

10.4

 

-

 

2

Increases due to amounts set aside for estimated loan losses during the period

1

3.1

 

-

 

2.3

 

-

 

4

Decreases due to amounts taken against accumulated credit risk adjustments

 

(2.9

)

-

 

(2.5

)

-

 

6

Impact of exchange rate differences

 

-

 

-

 

(0.4

)

-

 

9

Closing balance at the end of the period

 

10.0

 

-

 

9.8

 

-

 

10

Recoveries on credit risk adjustments recorded directly to the statement of profit or loss

 

0.4

 

-

 

0.4

 

-

 

1 Following adoption of IFRS 9 'Financial Instruments', the movement due to amounts set aside for estimated loan losses during the period has been reported on a net basis.

Table 28: Changes in stock of defaulted loans and debt securities (CR2-B)

 

 

 

Twelve months to 31 Dec 

 

 

 

2019

2018

 

 

 

Gross carrying value

Gross carrying value

 

 

Footnotes

$bn

$bn

1

Defaulted loans and debt securities at the beginning of the period

 

13.7

 

15.1

 

2

Loans and debt securities that have defaulted since the last reporting period

 

6.5

 

5.7

 

3

Returned to non-defaulted status

 

(1.0

)

(1.3

)

4

Amounts written off

 

(2.9

)

(2.5

)

5

Other changes

1

(0.1

)

(0.8

)

7

Repayments

 

(1.6

)

(2.5

)

6

Defaulted loans and debt securities at the end of the period

 

14.6

 

13.7

 

1 Other changes include foreign exchange movements and changes in assets held for sale in default.

Non-performing and forborne exposures

Tables 29 to 32 are presented in accordance with the EBA's 'Guidelines on disclosure of non-performing and forborne exposures'.

The EBA defines non-performing exposures as exposures with material amounts that are more than 90 days past due or exposures where the debtor is assessed as unlikely to pay its credit obligations in full without the realisation of collateral, regardless of the existence of any past due amounts or number days past due. Any debtors that are in default for regulatory purposes or impaired under the applicable accounting framework are always considered as non-performing exposures. The Annual Report and Accounts 2019 does not define non-performing exposures, however, the definition of credit-impaired (stage 3) is aligned to the EBA's definition of non-performing exposures.

Forborne exposures are defined by the EBA as exposures where the bank has made concessions toward a debtor that is

 

experiencing or about to experience financial difficulties in meeting its financial commitments. In the Annual Report and Accounts 2019, forborne exposures are reported as 'renegotiated loans'. This term is aligned to the EBA definition of forborne exposure, except in its treatment of 'cures'.

Under the EBA definition, exposures cease to be reported as forborne if they pass three tests:

• the forborne exposure must have been considered to be performing for a 'probation period' of at least two years;

• regular payments of more than an insignificant aggregate amount of principal or interest have been made during at least half of the probation period; and

• no exposure to the debtor is more than 30 days past due at the end of the probation period.

In the Annual Report and Accounts 2019, renegotiated loans retain this classification until maturity or de-recognition.

 

Table 29: Credit quality of forborne exposures 

 

 

Gross carrying amount/nominal amount

 

Accumulated impairment, accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk and provisions

 

Collateral received and financial guarantees received on forborne exposures

 

 

Performing forborne

Non-performing forborne

 

On performing forborne exposures

On non-performing forborne exposures

 

Total

Of which forborne non-performing exposures

 

 

Total

Of which defaulted

Of which impaired

 

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

$bn

$bn

 

$bn

$bn

 

At 31 Dec 2019

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Loans and advances

1.7

 

5.7

 

5.7

 

5.7

 

 

-

 

(1.8

)

 

3.2

 

2.4

 

2

Central banks

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

3

General governments

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

4

Credit institutions

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

5

Other financial corporations

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

6

Non-financial corporations

1.7

 

3.5

 

3.5

 

3.5

 

 

-

 

(1.4

)

 

1.8

 

1.0

 

7

Households

-

 

2.2

 

2.2

 

2.2

 

 

-

 

(0.4

)

 

1.4

 

1.4

 

8

Debt securities

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

9

Loan commitments given

-

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

 

-

 

-

 

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

10

Total

1.7

 

5.8

 

5.8

 

5.8

 

 

-

 

(1.8

)

 

3.3

 

2.5

 

Table 30 presents an analysis of performing and non-performing exposures by days past due. The gross non-performing loan ('NPL') ratio at 31 Dec 2019 was 0.94% calculated in line with the EBA guidelines.

Table 30: Credit quality of performing and non-performing exposures by past due days

 

 

Gross carrying amount/nominal amount1

 

 

Performing exposures

 

Non-performing exposures

 

 

Total

Not past due or past due ≤ 30 days

Past due > 30 days ≤ 90 days

 

Total

Unlikely to pay but not past due or past due ≤ 90 days

Past due > 90 days ≤ 180 days

Past due > 180 days ≤ 1 year

Past due > 1 year ≤ 2 years

Past due > 2 years ≤ 5 years

Past due > 5 years ≤ 7 years

Past due > 7 years

of which: defaulted

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

At 31 Dec 2019

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Loans and advances

1,535.0

 

1,533.2

 

1.8

 

 

14.6

 

7.4

 

2.8

 

0.8

 

1.1

 

1.7

 

0.3

 

0.5

 

14.6

 

2

Central banks

191.7

 

191.7

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

3

General governments

9.9

 

9.9

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

4

Credit institutions

126.0

 

126.0

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

5

Other financial corporations

238.5

 

238.4

 

0.1

 

 

0.3

 

0.3

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.3

 

6

Non-financial corporations

537.6

 

537.2

 

0.4

 

 

9.5

 

4.8

 

1.9

 

0.3

 

0.8

 

1.1

 

0.2

 

0.4

 

9.5

 

8

Households

431.3

 

430.0

 

1.3

 

 

4.8

 

2.3

 

0.9

 

0.5

 

0.3

 

0.6

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

4.8

 

9

Debt securities

381.2

 

381.2

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

10

Central banks

66.9

 

66.9

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

11

General governments

229.9

 

229.9

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

12

Credit institutions

36.8

 

36.8

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

13

Other financial corporations

41.0

 

41.0

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

14

Non-financial corporations

6.6

 

6.6

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

15

Off-balance-sheet exposures

709.5

 

N/A

N/A

 

1.2

 

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1.2

 

16

Central banks

0.1

 

N/A

N/A

 

-

 

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

-

 

17

General governments

2.7

 

N/A

N/A

 

-

 

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

-

 

18

Credit institutions

56.3

 

N/A

N/A

 

-

 

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

-

 

19

Other financial corporations

54.9

 

N/A

N/A

 

-

 

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

-

 

20

Non-financial corporations

373.1

 

N/A

N/A

 

1.0

 

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1.0

 

21

Households

222.4

 

N/A

N/A

 

0.2

 

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

0.2

 

22

Total

2,625.7

 

1,914.4

 

1.8

 

 

15.8

 

7.4

 

2.8

 

0.8

 

1.1

 

1.7

 

0.3

 

0.5

 

15.8

 

1 Includes reverse repos and settlement accounts

The table below provides information on the instruments that were cancelled in exchange for collateral obtained by taking possession and on the value of the collateral obtained by taking possession. The value at initial recognition represents the gross carrying amount of the collateral obtained by taking possession at initial recognition on the balance sheet, whilst the accumulated negative changes is the accumulated impairment or negative change on the initial recognition value of the collateral obtained by taking possession including amortisation in the case of PP&E and investment properties.

Table 31: Collateral obtained by taking possession and execution processes

 

 

 At 31 Dec 2019

 

 

Collateral obtained by taking possession

 

 

Value at initial recognition

Accumulated negative changes

 

 

$bn

$bn

1

Property, plant and equipment (PP&E)

-

 

-

 

2

Other than PP&E

0.1

 

-

 

3

Residential immovable property

0.1

 

-

 

8

Total

0.1

 

-

 

The following table provides information on the gross carrying amount of exposures and related impairment with further detail on the IFRS 9 stage, accumulated partial write off and collateral. The IFRS 9 stages have the following characteristics:

• stage 1: These financial assets are unimpaired and without a significant increase in credit risk. A 12-month allowance for ECL is recognised;

• stage 2: A significant increase in credit risk has been experienced on these financial assets since initial recognition. A lifetime ECL is recognised;

• stage 3: There is objective evidence of impairment and the financial assets are therefore considered to be in default or otherwise credit impaired. A lifetime ECL is recognised.

• Purchased or originated credit-impaired ('POCI'): Financial assets purchased or originated at a deep discount are seen to reflect incurred credit losses. A lifetime ECL is recognised. These exposures are included in stage 3 in table 32 below.

Refer to the section 'EL and credit risk adjustments' on page 44 for further information on IFRS 9.

Credit-impaired (stage 3) exposures are disclosed on page 105 and 120 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

 

Table 32: Performing and non-performing exposures and related provisions

 

 

Gross carrying amount/nominal amount1

Accumulated impairment, accumulated negative changes in fair value due to credit risk and provisions

Accu-mulated partial write-off

Collaterals and financial guarantees received

 

 

Performing exposures

Non-performing exposures

Performing exposures

Non-performing exposures

On perfor-ming expo-

sures

On non-perfo-rming expo-

sures

 

 

 

of which stage 1

of which stage 2

 

of which stage 2

of which stage 3

 

of which stage 1

of which stage 2

 

of which stage 2

of which stage 3

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

At 31 Dec 2019

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Loans and advances

1,535.0

 

1,448.0

 

82.0

 

14.6

 

-

 

14.6

 

(3.8

)

(1.4

)

(2.5

)

(5.5

)

-

 

(5.5

)

(0.5

)

931.4

 

5.6

 

2

Central banks

191.7

 

190.4

 

1.3

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

8.3

 

-

 

3

General governments

9.9

 

9.3

 

0.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.1

 

-

 

4

Credit institutions

126.0

 

125.8

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

83.9

 

-

 

5

Other financial corporations

238.5

 

229.4

 

5.2

 

0.3

 

-

 

0.3

 

(0.1

)

(0.1

)

(0.1

)

(0.2

)

-

 

(0.2

)

-

 

169.3

 

-

 

6

Non-financial corporations

537.6

 

477.7

 

59.2

 

9.5

 

-

 

9.5

 

(1.7

)

(0.7

)

(1.0

)

(4.1

)

-

 

(4.1

)

(0.2

)

295.0

 

2.7

 

8

Households

431.3

 

415.4

 

15.6

 

4.8

 

-

 

4.8

 

(2.0

)

(0.6

)

(1.4

)

(1.2

)

-

 

(1.2

)

(0.3

)

372.8

 

2.9

 

9

Debt securities

381.2

 

379.6

 

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

(0.1

)

-

 

(0.1

)

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

19.3

 

-

 

10

Central banks

66.9

 

66.8

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

11

General governments

229.9

 

229.0

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

(0.1

)

-

 

(0.1

)

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

6.3

 

-

 

12

Credit institutions

36.8

 

36.8

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

13

Other financial corporations

41.0

 

40.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

13.0

 

-

 

14

Non-financial corporations

6.6

 

6.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

15

Off-balance-sheet exposures

709.5

 

614.6

 

24.0

 

1.2

 

-

 

1.2

 

(0.4

)

(0.1

)

(0.2

)

(0.2

)

-

 

(0.1

)

 

117.5

 

0.1

 

16

Central banks

0.1

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

17

General governments

2.7

 

1.7

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

0.3

 

-

 

18

Credit institutions

56.3

 

52.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

0.4

 

-

 

19

Other financial corporations

54.9

 

51.2

 

1.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

(0.1

)

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

6.9

 

-

 

20

Non-financial corporations

373.1

 

288.2

 

20.9

 

1.0

 

-

 

1.0

 

(0.3

)

(0.1

)

(0.2

)

(0.2

)

-

 

(0.1

)

 

60.6

 

0.1

 

21

Households

222.4

 

220.8

 

1.6

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

49.3

 

-

 

22

Total

2,625.7

 

2,442.2

 

106.4

 

15.8

 

-

 

15.8

 

(4.3

)

(1.5

)

(2.8

)

(5.7

)

-

 

(5.6

)

(0.5

)

1,068.2

 

5.7

 

1 Includes reverse repos and settlement accounts.

Table 33 analyses past due unimpaired and credit-impaired exposures on a regulatory consolidation basis using accounting values. There are no material differences between the regulatory and accounting scope of consolidation.

All amounts past due more than 90 days are considered credit impaired even where regulatory rules deem default as 180 days past due.

Table 33: Amount of past due unimpaired and credit-impaired exposures by geographical region 

 

Europe

Asia

MENA

North America

Latin America

Total

At 31 Dec 2019

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

Past due

4.2

 

5.0

 

3.2

 

2.1

 

1.2

 

15.7

 

- personal

2.1

 

2.7

 

0.7

 

1.5

 

0.6

 

7.6

 

- corporate and commercial

2.1

 

1.7

 

2.5

 

0.5

 

0.5

 

7.3

 

- financial

-

 

0.6

 

-

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

0.8

 

At 31 Dec 2018

 

 

 

 

 

 

Past due

5.0

 

5.2

 

3.3

 

2.3

 

1.3

 

17.1

 

- personal

2.1

 

2.6

 

0.8

 

1.5

 

0.6

 

7.6

 

- corporate and commercial

2.9

 

2.4

 

2.3

 

0.8

 

0.7

 

9.1

 

- financial

-

 

0.2

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

0.4

 

Concentration risk

Concentrations of credit risk arise when a number of counterparties or exposures have comparable economic

characteristics, are engaged in similar activities or operate in the same geographical areas or industry sectors so that their collective ability to meet contractual obligations is uniformly affected by changes in economic, political or other conditions.

We have a number of global businesses with a broad range of products. We operate in a number of geographical markets with the majority of our exposures in Asia and Europe. We use a number of controls and measures to minimise undue concentration of exposure in our portfolios across industries, countries and global businesses. These include portfolio

and counterparty limits, approval and review controls, and stress

testing. The following tables present information on the concentration of exposures by geography and industry.

 

Table 34: Geographical breakdown of exposures (CRB-C)

 

 

Net carrying values1,2

 

 

Europe

Of which:

Asia

Of which:

 

 

United Kingdom

France

Other countries

Hong Kong

China

Singapore

Australia

Other countries

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

IRB approach exposure classes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Central governments and central banks

3.7

 

0.1

 

-

 

3.6

 

172.0

 

54.1

 

28.7

 

15.8

 

8.9

 

64.5

 

2

Institutions

23.4

 

12.5

 

1.6

 

9.3

 

34.7

 

4.1

 

12.2

 

2.5

 

4.1

 

11.8

 

3

Corporates

308.1

 

169.0

 

47.4

 

91.7

 

461.0

 

216.3

 

85.6

 

32.8

 

24.6

 

101.7

 

4

Retail

243.3

 

214.1

 

26.6

 

2.6

 

251.6

 

202.2

 

5.9

 

12.3

 

17.3

 

13.9

 

6

Total IRB approach

578.5

 

395.7

 

75.6

 

107.2

 

919.3

 

476.7

 

132.4

 

63.4

 

54.9

 

191.9

 

 

Standardised approach exposure classes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

-

 

 

7

Central governments and central banks

172.1

 

99.4

 

50.5

 

22.2

 

0.9

 

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

0.4

 

8

Regional governments or local authorities

2.8

 

-

 

-

 

2.8

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

9

Public sector entities

16.6

 

-

 

2.9

 

13.7

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

10

Multilateral development banks

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

11

International organisations

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

12

Institutions

1.0

 

0.1

 

0.8

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

13

Corporates

23.0

 

2.8

 

3.6

 

16.6

 

53.7

 

32.3

 

5.7

 

4.9

 

2.6

 

8.2

 

14

Retail

3.1

 

1.3

 

0.3

 

1.5

 

45.0

 

11.7

 

4.8

 

7.5

 

1.8

 

19.2

 

15

Secured by mortgages on immovable property

7.6

 

2.4

 

1.0

 

4.2

 

16.7

 

3.6

 

8.0

 

0.6

 

0.1

 

4.4

 

16

Exposures in default

0.6

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

0.4

 

0.4

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.3

 

17

Items associated with particularly high risk

3.4

 

1.1

 

0.9

 

1.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

20

Collective investment undertakings ('CIU')

0.4

 

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

21

Equity exposures

1.7

 

1.1

 

0.5

 

0.1

 

13.4

 

1.8

 

11.4

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

22

Other exposures

4.0

 

3.0

 

0.9

 

0.1

 

7.0

 

4.9

 

0.8

 

-

 

-

 

1.3

 

23

Total standardised approach

236.3

 

111.7

 

61.5

 

63.1

 

137.2

 

54.8

 

30.8

 

13.1

 

4.6

 

33.9

 

24

Total at 31 Dec 2019

814.8

 

507.4

 

137.1

 

170.3

 

1,056.5

 

531.5

 

163.2

 

76.5

 

59.5

 

225.8

 

 

 

Table 34: Geographical breakdown of exposures (CRB-C)

 

 

Net carrying values1,2

 

 

MENA

NorthAmerica

Of which:

LatinAmerica

Other

Total

 

 

United States of America

Canada

Other countries

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

IRB approach exposure classes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Central governments and central banks

20.4

 

129.3

 

108.4

 

20.8

 

0.1

 

8.9

 

12.0

 

346.3

 

2

Institutions

6.2

 

10.3

 

2.1

 

8.2

 

-

 

0.8

 

-

 

75.4

 

3

Corporates

48.5

 

223.1

 

159.3

 

55.6

 

8.2

 

6.8

 

-

 

1,047.5

 

4

Retail

3.5

 

55.8

 

27.4

 

25.1

 

3.3

 

0.2

 

-

 

554.4

 

6

Total IRB approach

78.6

 

418.5

 

297.2

 

109.7

 

11.6

 

16.7

 

12.0

 

2,023.6

 

 

Standardised approach exposure classes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Central governments and central banks

1.7

 

1.7

 

1.6

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.5

 

-

 

176.9

 

8

Regional governments or local authorities

5.0

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1.1

 

-

 

8.9

 

9

Public sector entities

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

16.6

 

10

Multilateral development banks

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

11

International organisations

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1.6

 

1.6

 

12

Institutions

1.3

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.4

 

13

Corporates

44.8

 

10.6

 

7.6

 

0.7

 

2.3

 

27.7

 

-

 

159.8

 

14

Retail

8.7

 

4.6

 

2.3

 

1.9

 

0.4

 

9.3

 

-

 

70.7

 

15

Secured by mortgages on immovable property

3.9

 

1.8

 

0.6

 

0.1

 

1.1

 

3.4

 

-

 

33.4

 

16

Exposures in default

1.6

 

0.3

 

-

 

-

 

0.3

 

0.5

 

-

 

3.4

 

17

Items associated with particularly high risk

0.2

 

1.8

 

0.9

 

-

 

0.9

 

0.1

 

-

 

5.5

 

20

Collective investment undertakings ('CIU')

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.4

 

21

Equity exposures

0.2

 

1.0

 

1.0

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

16.4

 

22

Other exposures

0.6

 

0.7

 

0.6

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.6

 

-

 

12.9

 

23

Total standardised approach

68.0

 

22.5

 

14.6

 

2.9

 

5.0

 

43.3

 

1.7

 

509.0

 

24

Total at 31 Dec 2019

146.6

 

441.0

 

311.8

 

112.6

 

16.6

 

60.0

 

13.7

 

2,532.6

 

 

Table 34: Geographical breakdown of exposures (CRB-C) (continued)

 

 

Net carrying values1,2

 

 

Europe

Of which:

Asia

Of which:

 

 

United Kingdom

France

Other countries

Hong Kong

China

Singapore

Australia

Other countries

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

IRB approach exposure classes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Central governments and central banks

4.3

 

0.4

 

0.1

 

3.8

 

172.4

 

52.9

 

29.7

 

15.4

 

7.2

 

67.2

 

2

Institutions

23.1

 

8.7

 

1.8

 

12.6

 

40.8

 

7.0

 

13.9

 

2.6

 

4.4

 

12.9

 

3

Corporates

307.9

 

171.7

 

47.2

 

89.0

 

440.9

 

207.9

 

79.8

 

32.2

 

22.9

 

98.1

 

4

Retail

228.1

 

201.0

 

25.1

 

2.0

 

199.9

 

161.5

 

5.4

 

6.8

 

13.8

 

12.4

 

6

Total IRB approach

563.4

 

381.8

 

74.2

 

107.4

 

854.0

 

429.3

 

128.8

 

57.0

 

48.3

 

190.6

 

 

Standardised approach exposure classes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Central governments and central banks

158.6

 

82.7

 

45.3

 

30.6

 

0.8

 

0.5

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

0.2

 

8

Regional governments or local authorities

2.7

 

-

 

-

 

2.7

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

9

Public sector entities

12.1

 

-

 

0.2

 

11.9

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

10

Multilateral development banks

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

11

International organisations

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

12

Institutions

1.0

 

-

 

0.9

 

0.1

 

0.2

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

13

Corporates

27.3

 

2.9

 

4.2

 

20.2

 

69.3

 

45.3

 

5.5

 

7.8

 

2.0

 

8.7

 

14

Retail

3.0

 

1.2

 

0.4

 

1.4

 

40.2

 

10.5

 

3.8

 

6.6

 

1.9

 

17.4

 

15

Secured by mortgages on immovable property

5.5

 

1.4

 

0.8

 

3.3

 

18.8

 

6.2

 

7.5

 

0.4

 

0.2

 

4.5

 

16

Exposures in default

0.6

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.5

 

0.4

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.3

 

17

Items associated with particularly high risk

2.9

 

1.3

 

0.5

 

1.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

20

Collective investment undertakings ('CIU')

0.6

 

0.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

21

Equity exposures

1.5

 

0.9

 

0.5

 

0.1

 

12.5

 

1.5

 

10.8

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

22

Other exposures

3.8

 

3.0

 

0.6

 

0.2

 

6.2

 

4.2

 

0.9

 

-

 

-

 

1.1

 

23

Total standardised approach

219.6

 

94.1

 

53.4

 

72.1

 

148.4

 

68.4

 

28.5

 

14.9

 

4.2

 

32.4

 

24

Total at 31 Dec 2018

783.0

 

475.9

 

127.6

 

179.5

 

1,002.4

 

497.7

 

157.3

 

71.9

 

52.5

 

223.0

 

 

 

Table 34: Geographical breakdown of exposures (CRB-C) (continued)

 

 

Net carrying values1,2

 

 

MENA

NorthAmerica

Of which:

LatinAmerica

Other

Total

 

 

United States of America

Canada

Other countries

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

IRB approach exposure classes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Central governments and central banks

17.1

 

111.9

 

89.2

 

22.7

 

-

 

12.8

 

13.2

 

331.7

 

2

Institutions

6.3

 

10.2

 

1.9

 

8.0

 

0.3

 

0.6

 

0.1

 

81.1

 

3

Corporates

45.8

 

223.2

 

162.8

 

51.8

 

8.6

 

9.0

 

-

 

1,026.8

 

4

Retail

2.4

 

52.6

 

27.8

 

22.3

 

2.5

 

0.3

 

-

 

483.3

 

6

Total IRB approach

71.6

 

397.9

 

281.7

 

104.8

 

11.4

 

22.7

 

13.3

 

1,922.9

 

 

Standardised approach exposure classes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Central governments and central banks

1.7

 

2.2

 

2.1

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.6

 

-

 

163.9

 

8

Regional governments or local authorities

3.7

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.9

 

-

 

7.3

 

9

Public sector entities

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

12.2

 

10

Multilateral development banks

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

0.2

 

11

International organisations

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1.6

 

1.6

 

12

Institutions

2.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

3.4

 

13

Corporates

44.7

 

12.3

 

8.4

 

0.8

 

3.1

 

25.8

 

-

 

179.4

 

14

Retail

8.7

 

2.9

 

0.7

 

1.7

 

0.5

 

9.0

 

-

 

63.8

 

15

Secured by mortgages on immovable property

3.4

 

1.7

 

0.6

 

0.1

 

1.0

 

2.6

 

-

 

32.0

 

16

Exposures in default

1.1

 

0.4

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.3

 

0.5

 

-

 

3.0

 

17

Items associated with particularly high risk

0.2

 

1.6

 

0.8

 

-

 

0.8

 

0.1

 

-

 

4.8

 

20

Collective investment undertakings ('CIU')

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.6

 

21

Equity exposures

0.2

 

1.2

 

1.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

0.2

 

-

 

15.6

 

22

Other exposures

0.5

 

0.6

 

0.6

 

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

11.3

 

23

Total standardised approach

66.3

 

22.9

 

14.4

 

2.7

 

5.8

 

40.1

 

1.8

 

499.1

 

24

Total at 31 Dec 2018

137.9

 

420.8

 

296.1

 

107.5

 

17.2

 

62.8

 

15.1

 

2,422.0

 

1 Amounts shown by geographical region and country/territory in this table are based on the country/territory of residence of the counterparty.

2 Securitisation positions and non-credit obligation assets are not included in this table.

 

Table 35: Concentration of exposures by industry or counterparty types¹ (CRB-D)

 

 

Agriculture

Mining/oil

extraction

Manufac-turing

Utilities

Water supply

Construction

Whole-sale & retail trade

Trans-portation & storage

Accom-modation & food services

Infor-mation & commun-ication

Financial & insurance

 

Net carrying values1

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Central governments and central banks

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

0.5

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

150.2

 

2

Institutions

-

 

0.5

 

0.3

 

0.4

 

-

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.1

 

69.9

 

3

Corporates

7.7

 

35.3

 

234.6

 

27.7

 

3.1

 

38.0

 

181.8

 

41.1

 

25.5

 

14.3

 

111.9

 

4

Retail

1.0

 

-

 

0.8

 

-

 

-

 

0.3

 

1.4

 

0.2

 

0.4

 

0.1

 

4.8

 

6

Total IRB approach

8.7

 

35.8

 

235.8

 

28.6

 

3.1

 

38.4

 

183.4

 

41.6

 

25.9

 

14.5

 

336.8

 

7

Central governments and central banks

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

132.0

 

8

Regional governments or local authorities

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.3

 

9

Public sector entities

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

13.6

 

10

Multilateral development banks

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

11

International organisations

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

12

Institutions

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.4

 

13

Corporates

1.0

 

5.4

 

25.0

 

3.7

 

0.3

 

7.8

 

21.3

 

3.0

 

3.1

 

2.1

 

15.6

 

14

Retail

0.1

 

-

 

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

15

Secured by mortgages on immovable property

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.3

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

16

Exposures in default

-

 

-

 

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

17

Items associated with particularly high risk

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

4.8

 

20

Collective investment undertakings ('CIU')

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.4

 

21

Equity exposures

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

16.2

 

22

Other exposures

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

12.7

 

23

Total STD approach

1.1

 

5.4

 

25.9

 

3.7

 

0.3

 

8.3

 

21.7

 

3.2

 

3.3

 

2.2

 

198.3

 

24

Total at 31 Dec 2019

9.8

 

41.2

 

261.7

 

32.3

 

3.4

 

46.7

 

205.1

 

44.8

 

29.2

 

16.7

 

535.1

 

 

Table 35: Concentration of exposures by industry or counterparty types (CRB-D)

 

 

Real estate

Professional activities

Adminis-trative services

Public admin & defence

Education

Human health & social work

Arts & enter-tainment

Other services

Personal

Extra-territorial bodies

Total

 

Net carrying values1

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Central governments and central banks

-

 

-

 

-

 

164.8

 

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.3

 

-

 

30.0

 

346.3

 

2

Institutions

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

1.9

 

0.1

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1.4

 

75.4

 

3

Corporates

180.7

 

26.4

 

87.3

 

2.6

 

3.1

 

5.7

 

6.3

 

14.0

 

0.4

 

-

 

1,047.5

 

4

Retail

0.8

 

-

 

15.9

 

-

 

0.3

 

0.2

 

0.1

 

0.2

 

527.9

 

-

 

554.4

 

6

Total IRB approach

181.7

 

26.4

 

103.2

 

169.3

 

3.5

 

6.3

 

6.4

 

14.5

 

528.3

 

31.4

 

2,023.6

 

7

Central governments and central banks3

-

 

-

 

-

 

33.5

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1.5

 

-

 

9.8

 

176.9

 

8

Regional governments or local authorities

-

 

-

 

-

 

8.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

8.9

 

9

Public sector entities

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.6

 

16.6

 

10

Multilateral development banks

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

11

International organisations

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1.6

 

1.6

 

12

Institutions

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.4

 

13

Corporates

13.0

 

1.5

 

51.0

 

0.5

 

0.1

 

0.8

 

0.6

 

1.6

 

2.4

 

-

 

159.8

 

14

Retail

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

69.6

 

-

 

70.7

 

15

Secured by mortgages on immovable property

1.1

 

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

31.6

 

-

 

33.4

 

16

Exposures in default

0.1

 

0.1

 

1.0

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1.2

 

-

 

3.4

 

17

Items associated with particularly high risk

0.6

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

5.5

 

20

Collective investment undertakings

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.4

 

21

Equity exposures

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

16.4

 

22

Other exposures

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

12.9

 

23

Total STD approach

14.8

 

1.6

 

52.8

 

44.8

 

0.1

 

0.9

 

0.6

 

3.2

 

104.8

 

12.0

 

509.0

 

24

Total at 31 Dec 2019

196.5

 

28.0

 

156.0

 

214.1

 

3.6

 

7.2

 

7.0

 

17.7

 

633.1

 

43.4

 

2,532.6

 

 

 

Table 35: Concentration of exposures by industry or counterparty types¹ (CRB-D) (continued)

 

 

Agriculture

Mining/oil

extraction

Manufac-turing

Utilities

Water supply

Construction

Wholesale & retail trade

Trans-portation & storage

Accom-modation & food services

Infor-mation & commun-ication

Financial & insurance

 

Net carrying values1

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Central governments and central banks

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

140.2

 

2

Institutions

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

80.1

 

3

Corporates

6.8

 

35.4

 

228.6

 

26.5

 

3.6

 

32.5

 

181.0

 

40.6

 

23.7

 

16.6

 

120.2

 

4

Retail

1.0

 

-

 

0.8

 

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

1.4

 

0.3

 

0.4

 

-

 

0.2

 

6

Total IRB approach

7.8

 

35.6

 

229.4

 

27.3

 

3.6

 

32.7

 

182.4

 

40.9

 

24.1

 

16.6

 

340.7

 

7

Central governments and central banks

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

126.3

 

8

Regional governments or local authorities

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.3

 

9

Public sector entities

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

10.4

 

10

Multilateral development banks

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

11

International organisations

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

12

Institutions

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

3.4

 

13

Corporates

0.9

 

5.5

 

26.1

 

4.1

 

-

 

7.5

 

21.4

 

4.1

 

3.2

 

2.1

 

18.0

 

14

Retail

0.1

 

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

0.6

 

15

Secured by mortgages on immovable property

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

16

Exposures in default

-

 

-

 

0.5

 

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

0.3

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

17

Items associated with particularly high risk

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

4.2

 

20

Collective investment undertakings

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.6

 

21

Equity exposures

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

15.6

 

22

Other exposures

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

11.0

 

23

Total STD approach

1.0

 

5.5

 

26.8

 

4.1

 

-

 

7.9

 

21.9

 

4.3

 

3.3

 

2.1

 

190.8

 

24

Total at 31 Dec 2018

8.8

 

41.1

 

256.2

 

31.4

 

3.6

 

40.6

 

204.3

 

45.2

 

27.4

 

18.7

 

531.5

 

 

 

 

Real

estate

Professional activities

Adminis-

trative

services

Public admin & defence

Education

Human health & social work

Arts &

entertainment

Other services

Personal

Extra-territorial bodies

Total

 

Net carrying values1

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Central governments and central banks

-

 

-

 

-

 

154.5

 

-

 

0.3

 

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

36.1

 

331.7

 

2

Institutions

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

81.1

 

3

Corporates

173.4

 

26.5

 

80.7

 

2.6

 

2.9

 

5.5

 

7.6

 

11.5

 

0.6

 

-

 

1,026.8

 

4

Retail

1.0

 

-

 

0.4

 

-

 

0.1

 

0.2

 

0.2

 

0.1

 

477.0

 

-

 

483.3

 

6

Total IRB approach

174.4

 

26.5

 

81.1

 

157.3

 

3.1

 

6.0

 

7.8

 

11.8

 

477.6

 

36.2

 

1,922.9

 

7

Central governments and central banks

-

 

-

 

-

 

26.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

11.4

 

163.9

 

8

Regional governments or local authorities

-

 

-

 

-

 

7.0

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

7.3

 

9

Public sector entities

-

 

-

 

-

 

1.0

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.7

 

12.2

 

10

Multilateral development banks

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

11

International organisations

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1.6

 

1.6

 

12

Institutions

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

3.4

 

13

Corporates

14.3

 

2.1

 

64.4

 

0.5

 

0.3

 

1.0

 

0.7

 

1.1

 

2.1

 

-

 

179.4

 

14

Retail

0.1

 

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

62.2

 

-

 

63.8

 

15

Secured by mortgages on immovable property

0.5

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

31.3

 

-

 

32.0

 

16

Exposures in default

0.1

 

-

 

0.3

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

1.2

 

-

 

3.0

 

17

Items associated with particularly high risk

0.3

 

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

4.8

 

20

Collective investment undertakings

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.6

 

21

Equity exposures

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

15.6

 

22

Other exposures

-

 

-

 

0.3

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

11.3

 

23

Total STD approach

15.3

 

2.1

 

65.4

 

34.7

 

0.4

 

1.0

 

0.7

 

1.3

 

96.8

 

13.7

 

499.1

 

24

Total at 31 Dec 2018

189.7

 

28.6

 

146.5

 

192.0

 

3.5

 

7.0

 

8.5

 

13.1

 

574.4

 

49.9

 

2,422.0

 

1 The industry classifications of this disclosure have been revised. 31 December 2018 data have been restated to be on a consistent basis with the current year.

 2 Securitisation positions and non-credit obligation assets are not included in this table.

Table 36: Maturity of on-balance sheet exposures (CRB-E)

 

 

Net carrying values1

 

 

On demand

Less than

1 year

Between

1 and 5 years

More than

5 years

Undated

Total

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

IRB approach exposure classes

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Central governments and central banks

39.3

 

136.2

 

105.5

 

61.8

 

-

 

342.8

 

2

Institutions

11.8

 

27.9

 

22.2

 

1.3

 

-

 

63.2

 

3

Corporates

51.7

 

191.2

 

232.7

 

56.1

 

-

 

531.7

 

4

Retail

23.6

 

32.8

 

33.4

 

297.4

 

-

 

387.2

 

6

Total IRB approach

126.4

 

388.1

 

393.8

 

416.6

 

-

 

1,324.9

 

 

Standardised approach exposure classes

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Central governments and central banks

90.9

 

46.0

 

15.9

 

18.6

 

4.6

 

176.0

 

8

Regional governments or local authorities

0.8

 

0.9

 

5.3

 

1.5

 

-

 

8.5

 

9

Public sector entities

-

 

2.5

 

9.7

 

4.3

 

-

 

16.5

 

10

Multilateral development banks

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

11

International organisations

-

 

-

 

0.7

 

0.9

 

-

 

1.6

 

12

Institutions

0.3

 

1.4

 

0.5

 

-

 

-

 

2.2

 

13

Corporates

4.3

 

30.7

 

32.1

 

7.8

 

-

 

74.9

 

14

Retail

7.3

 

1.2

 

7.0

 

4.1

 

-

 

19.6

 

15

Secured by mortgages on immovable property

-

 

2.1

 

5.9

 

24.3

 

-

 

32.3

 

16

Exposures in default

0.3

 

0.7

 

1.4

 

0.8

 

-

 

3.2

 

17

Items associated with particularly high risk

-

 

0.2

 

0.6

 

0.1

 

2.2

 

3.1

 

20

Collective investment undertakings ('CIU')

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.4

 

0.4

 

21

Equity exposures

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

16.4

 

16.4

 

22

Other exposures

-

 

2.7

 

-

 

0.4

 

9.1

 

12.2

 

23

Total standardised approach

103.9

 

88.4

 

79.2

 

62.8

 

32.7

 

367.0

 

24

Total at 31 Dec 2019

230.3

 

476.5

 

473.0

 

479.4

 

32.7

 

1,691.9

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

IRB approach exposure classes

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Central governments and central banks

38.0

 

149.5

 

93.8

 

47.3

 

-

 

328.6

 

2

Institutions

10.1

 

35.1

 

23.4

 

0.9

 

-

 

69.5

 

3

Corporates

59.1

 

183.7

 

221.0

 

62.5

 

-

 

526.3

 

4

Retail

21.5

 

7.3

 

38.0

 

267.3

 

-

 

334.1

 

6

Total IRB approach

128.7

 

375.6

 

376.2

 

378.0

 

-

 

1,258.5

 

 

Standardised approach exposure classes

 

 

 

 

 

 

7

Central governments and central banks

75.5

 

50.5

 

22.9

 

8.8

 

5.2

 

162.9

 

8

Regional governments or local authorities

0.8

 

0.9

 

3.9

 

1.4

 

-

 

7.0

 

9

Public sector entities

-

 

2.6

 

7.3

 

2.2

 

-

 

12.1

 

10

Multilateral development banks

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

11

International organisations

-

 

0.8

 

0.3

 

0.5

 

-

 

1.6

 

12

Institutions

0.1

 

0.3

 

2.9

 

-

 

-

 

3.3

 

13

Corporates

3.9

 

44.0

 

36.5

 

6.6

 

-

 

91.0

 

14

Retail

6.8

 

2.0

 

7.0

 

4.5

 

-

 

20.3

 

15

Secured by mortgages on immovable property

-

 

1.9

 

5.0

 

23.7

 

-

 

30.6

 

16

Exposures in default

0.3

 

0.9

 

1.1

 

0.5

 

-

 

2.8

 

17

Items associated with particularly high risk

-

 

0.1

 

0.7

 

0.1

 

1.6

 

2.5

 

20

Collective investment undertakings ('CIU')

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.6

 

0.6

 

21

Equity exposures

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

15.6

 

15.6

 

22

Other exposures

-

 

2.7

 

-

 

0.2

 

7.6

 

10.5

 

23

Total standardised approach

87.4

 

106.7

 

87.8

 

48.5

 

30.6

 

361.0

 

24

Total at 31 Dec 2018

216.1

 

482.3

 

464.0

 

426.5

 

30.6

 

1,619.5

 

1 Securitisation positions and non-credit obligation assets are not included in this table.

Risk mitigation

Our approach when granting credit facilities is to do so on the basis of capacity to repay, rather than placing primary reliance on credit risk mitigants. Depending on a customer's standing and the type of product, facilities may be provided unsecured.

Mitigation of credit risk is a key aspect of effective risk management and takes many forms. Our general policy is to promote the use of credit risk mitigation, justified by commercial prudence and capital efficiency. Detailed policies cover the acceptability, structuring and terms with regard to the availability of credit risk mitigation such as in the form of collateral security. These policies, together with the setting of suitable valuation parameters, are subject to regular review to ensure that they are supported by empirical evidence and continue to fulfil their intended purpose.

 

Collateral

The most common method of mitigating credit risk is to take collateral. In our retail residential and commercial real estate ('CRE') businesses, a mortgage over the property is usually taken to help secure claims. Physical collateral is also taken in various forms of specialised lending and leasing transactions where income from the physical assets that are financed is also the principal source of facility repayment. In the commercial and industrial sectors, charges are created over business assets such as premises, stock and debtors. Loans to private banking clients may be made against a pledge of eligible marketable securities, cash or real estate. Facilities to small- and medium-sized enterprises ('SMEs') are commonly granted against guarantees given by their owners and/or directors.

For credit risk mitigants in the form of immovable property, the key determinant of concentration at Group level is geographic. Use of immovable property mitigants for risk management purposes is predominantly in Asia and Europe.

Further information regarding collateral held over CRE and residential property is provided on pages 112 and 123, respectively, of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

Financial collateral

In the institutional sector, trading facilities are supported by charges over financial instruments, such as cash, debt securities and equities. Financial collateral in the form of marketable securities is used in much of the Group's derivatives activities and in securities financing transactions, such as repos, reverse repos, securities lending and borrowing. Netting is used extensively and is a prominent feature of market standard documentation.

Further information regarding collateral held for trading exposures is on page 118 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

In the non-trading book, we provide customers with working capital management products. In some cases, these products combine loans and advances to customers with customer accounts over which we have right of offset which comply with the regulatory requirements for on-balance sheet netting. Where this applies, the customer accounts are treated as cash collateral and are reflected in our LGD estimates.

Under on-balance sheet netting, the customer accounts are treated as cash collateral and the effects of this collateral are incorporated in our LGD estimates. For risk management purposes, the net amounts of such exposures are subject to limits and the relevant customer agreements are subject to review to ensure the legal right of offset remains appropriate.

At 31 December 2019, $31bn of customer accounts were treated as cash collateral, mainly in the UK.

Other forms of credit risk mitigation

Our Global Banking and Markets ('GB&M') business utilises credit risk mitigation to manage the credit risk of its portfolios, with the goal of reducing concentrations in individual names, sectors or portfolios. The techniques in use include credit default swap ('CDS') purchases, structured credit notes and securitisation structures. Buying credit protection creates credit exposure against the protection provider, which is monitored as part of the overall credit exposure to them. Where applicable, the transaction is entered into directly with a central clearing house counterparty; otherwise our exposure to CDS protection providers is diversified among mainly banking counterparties with strong credit ratings.In our corporate lending, we also take guarantees from corporates and export credit agencies ('ECA'). Corporates would normally provide guarantees as part of a parent/subsidiary or common parent relationship and would span a number of credit grades. The ECAs will normally be investment grade.

Policy and procedures

Policies and procedures govern the protection of our position from the outset of a customer relationship; for instance, in requiring standard terms and conditions or specifically agreed documentation permitting the offset of credit balances against debt obligations, and through controls over the integrity, current valuation and, if necessary, realisation of collateral security.

Valuing collateral

Valuation strategies are established to monitor collateral mitigants to ensure that they will continue to provide the anticipated secure secondary repayment source. The frequency of valuation increases with the volatility of the collateral. For market trading activities such as collateralised over-the-counter ('OTC') derivatives and securities financing transactions ('SFTs'), we typically carry out daily valuations. In the residential mortgage business, Group policy prescribes revaluation at intervals of up to three years, or more frequently as the need arises; for example, where market conditions are subject to significant change. Residential property collateral values are determined through a combination of professional appraisals, house price indices or statistical analysis.

Local market conditions determine the frequency of valuation for CRE. Revaluations are sought where, for example, material concerns arise in relation to the performance of the collateral. CRE revaluation also occurs commonly in circumstances where an obligor's credit quality has declined sufficiently to cause concern that the principal payment source may not fully meet the obligation.

Recognition of risk mitigation under the IRB approach

Within an IRB approach, risk mitigants are considered in two broad categories:

• those which reduce the intrinsic PD of an obligor and therefore operate as determinants of PD; and

• those which affect the estimated recoverability of obligations and require adjustment of LGD or, in certain limited circumstances, EAD.

The first category typically includes full parental guarantees where one obligor within a group guarantees another. In these circumstances, the parent guarantor materially influences the PD of the guaranteed obligor. PD estimates are also subject to a 'sovereign ceiling', constraining the risk ratings assigned to obligors in countries of higher risk, and where only partial parental support exists. In certain jurisdictions, certain types of third-party guarantee are recognised by substituting the obligor's PD with that of the guarantor.

In the second category, LGD estimates are affected by a wider range of collateral, including cash, charges over real estate property, fixed assets, trade goods, receivables and floating charges such as mortgage debentures. Unfunded mitigants, such as third-party guarantees, are also considered in LGD estimates where there is evidence that they reduce loss expectation.

The main types of provider of guarantees are banks, other financial institutions and corporates. The creditworthiness of providers of unfunded credit risk mitigation is taken into consideration as part of the guarantor's risk profile. Internal limits for such contingent exposure are approved in the same way as direct exposures.

EAD and LGD values, in the case of individually assessed exposures, are determined by reference to regionally approved internal risk parameters based on the nature of the exposure. For retail portfolios, credit risk mitigation data is incorporated into the internal risk parameters for exposures and feeds into the calculation of the expected loss ('EL') band value summarising both customer delinquency and product or facility risk. Credit and credit risk mitigation data form inputs submitted by all Group offices to centralised databases. A range of collateral recognition approaches are applied to IRB capital treatments:

• Unfunded protection, which includes credit derivatives and guarantees, is reflected through adjustment or determination of PD or LGD. Under the IRB advanced approach, recognition may be through PD or LGD.

• Eligible financial collateral under the IRB advanced approach is recognised in LGD models. Under the IRB foundation approach, regulatory LGD values are adjusted. The adjustment to LGD is based on the degree to which the exposure value would be adjusted notionally if the financial collateral comprehensive method were applied.

• For all other types of collateral, including real estate, the LGD for exposures under the IRB advanced approach is calculated by models. For IRB foundation, base regulatory LGDs are adjusted depending on the value and type of the asset taken as collateral relative to the exposure. The types of eligible mitigant recognised under the IRB foundation approach are more limited.

Table 39 sets out, for IRB exposures, the exposure value and the effective value of credit risk mitigation expressed as the exposure value covered by the credit risk mitigant. IRB credit risk mitigation reductions of EAD were immaterial at 31 December 2019.

Recognition of risk mitigation under the standardised approach

Where credit risk mitigation is available in the form of an eligible guarantee, non-financial collateral or a credit derivative, the exposure is divided into covered and uncovered portions. The covered portion is determined after applying an appropriate 'haircut' for currency and maturity mismatches (and for omission of restructuring clauses in credit derivatives, where appropriate) to the amount of the protection provided and attracts the risk weight of the protection provider. The uncovered portion attracts the risk weight of the obligor.

The value of exposure fully or partially covered by eligible financial collateral is adjusted under the financial collateral comprehensive method using supervisory volatility adjustments (including those for currency mismatch) which are determined by the specific type of collateral (and its credit quality, in the case of eligible debt securities) and its liquidation period. The adjusted exposure value is subject to the risk weight of the obligor.

Table 37: Credit risk mitigation techniques - overview (CR3)

 

 

Exposures unsecured: carrying amount

Exposures secured: carrying amount

Exposures secured

by collateral

Exposures secured

by financial guarantees

Exposures secured by credit derivatives

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Loans

626.0

 

653.2

 

546.1

 

106.6

 

0.5

 

2

Debt securities

335.8

 

41.5

 

35.6

 

5.9

 

-

 

3

Total at 31 Dec 2019

961.8

 

694.7

 

581.7

 

112.5

 

0.5

 

4

of which: defaulted

5.3

 

4.2

 

3.7

 

0.5

 

-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Loans

641.2

 

596.8

 

494.0

 

102.1

 

0.7

 

2

Debt securities

316.1

 

32.4

 

27.2

 

5.2

 

-

 

3

Total at 31 Dec 2018

957.3

 

629.2

 

521.2

 

107.3

 

0.7

 

4

of which: defaulted

6.3

 

4.6

 

4.1

 

0.4

 

-

 

 

Table 38: Standardised approach - credit conversion factor ('CCF') and credit risk mitigation ('CRM') effects (CR4)

 

 

Exposures before CCFand CRM

 

Exposures post-CCFand CRM

 

RWAs and RWA density

 

 

On-balance sheet amount

Off-balance sheet amount

 

On-balance sheet amount

Off-balance sheet amount

 

RWAs

RWA density

 

 

$bn

$bn

 

$bn

$bn

 

$bn

%

 

Asset classes1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Central governments or central banks

175.8

 

0.9

 

 

183.9

 

1.6

 

 

11.2

 

6

 

2

Regional governments or local authorities

8.5

 

0.4

 

 

8.8

 

0.1

 

 

1.6

 

18

 

3

Public sector entities

16.5

 

0.1

 

 

16.4

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

4

Multilateral development banks

0.1

 

-

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

5

International organisations

1.6

 

-

 

 

1.6

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

6

Institutions

2.2

 

0.2

 

 

1.5

 

0.1

 

 

0.9

 

58

 

7

Corporates

75.0

 

84.9

 

 

66.3

 

10.5

 

 

72.5

 

94

 

8

Retail

19.8

 

51.1

 

 

19.1

 

0.4

 

 

14.4

 

74

 

9

Secured by mortgage on immovable property

32.3

 

1.1

 

 

32.2

 

0.3

 

 

12.0

 

37

 

10

Exposures in default

3.6

 

0.2

 

 

3.6

 

-

 

 

4.1

 

114

 

11

Higher-risk categories

3.1

 

2.4

 

 

3.1

 

2.2

 

 

7.9

 

150

 

14

Collective investment undertakings

0.4

 

-

 

 

0.4

 

-

 

 

0.4

 

100

 

15

Equity

16.5

 

-

 

 

16.5

 

-

 

 

36.3

 

220

 

16

Other items

12.2

 

0.7

 

 

12.2

 

0.7

 

 

8.8

 

68

 

17

Total at 31 Dec 2019

367.6

 

142.0

 

 

365.7

 

15.9

 

 

170.1

 

45

 

1

Central governments or central banks

162.7

 

1.0

 

 

170.8

 

1.1

 

 

12.5

 

7

 

2

Regional governments or local authorities

7.0

 

0.3

 

 

7.0

 

0.1

 

 

1.3

 

19

 

3

Public sector entities

12.1

 

0.1

 

 

12.0

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

4

Multilateral development banks

0.2

 

-

 

 

0.2

 

-

 

 

-

 

2

 

5

International organisations

1.6

 

-

 

 

1.6

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

6

Institutions

3.3

 

0.1

 

 

2.3

 

-

 

 

1.2

 

52

 

7

Corporates

91.2

 

88.3

 

 

72.0

 

12.2

 

 

79.2

 

94

 

8

Retail

20.5

 

43.5

 

 

19.7

 

0.2

 

 

14.8

 

74

 

9

Secured by mortgage on immovable property

30.6

 

1.4

 

 

30.6

 

0.3

 

 

11.3

 

37

 

10

Exposures in default

3.3

 

0.2

 

 

3.3

 

-

 

 

3.8

 

117

 

11

Higher-risk categories

2.5

 

2.3

 

 

2.4

 

2.2

 

 

6.9

 

150

 

14

Collective investment undertakings

0.6

 

-

 

 

0.6

 

-

 

 

0.6

 

100

 

15

Equity

15.7

 

-

 

 

15.7

 

-

 

 

35.0

 

223

 

16

Other items

10.5

 

0.8

 

 

10.5

 

0.8

 

 

6.6

 

58

 

17

Total at 31 Dec 2018

361.8

 

138.0

 

 

348.7

 

16.9

 

 

173.2

 

47

 

1 Securitisation positions are not included in this table.

 

Table 39: Credit risk mitigation techniques - IRB and Standardised

 

 

At 31 Dec 2019

At 31 Dec 2018

 

 

Exposures unsecured: carrying amount

Exposures secured: carrying amount

Secured by:

Exposures unsecured: carrying amount

Exposures secured: carrying amount

Secured by:

 

 

collateral

financial guarantees

credit derivatives

collateral

financial guarantees

credit derivatives

 

Footnotes

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

Exposures under the IRB approach

1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Central governments and central banks

 

309.4

 

36.9

 

35.2

 

1.7

 

-

 

303.4

 

28.3

 

26.8

 

1.5

 

-

 

Institutions

 

69.9

 

5.5

 

4.7

 

0.8

 

-

 

75.0

 

6.1

 

4.4

 

1.7

 

-

 

Corporates

 

612.6

 

434.9

 

305.3

 

116.5

 

13.1

 

618.0

 

408.8

 

287.6

 

110.3

 

10.9

 

Retail

 

205.6

 

348.8

 

322.0

 

26.8

 

-

 

192.0

 

291.3

 

267.9

 

23.4

 

-

 

Securitisation positions

 

20.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

29.7

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

Total

 

1,217.7

 

826.1

 

667.2

 

145.8

 

13.1

 

1,218.1

 

734.5

 

586.7

 

136.9

 

10.9

 

Exposures under the STD approach

1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Central governments and central banks

2

171.7

 

0.6

 

0.1

 

0.5

 

-

 

157.9

 

0.8

 

-

 

0.8

 

-

 

Institutions

 

1.6

 

0.8

 

-

 

0.8

 

-

 

2.3

 

1.1

 

-

 

1.1

 

-

 

Corporates

 

117.5

 

42.3

 

32.0

 

10.3

 

-

 

125.6

 

53.8

 

43.0

 

10.8

 

-

 

Retail

 

69.5

 

1.2

 

1.0

 

0.2

 

-

 

62.3

 

1.5

 

1.3

 

0.2

 

-

 

Secured by mortgages on immovable property

 

11.8

 

21.6

 

21.5

 

0.1

 

-

 

9.8

 

22.2

 

22.1

 

0.1

 

-

 

Exposures in default

 

2.7

 

0.7

 

0.6

 

0.1

 

-

 

2.4

 

0.6

 

0.5

 

0.1

 

-

 

Items associated with particularly high risk

3

2.0

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

1.7

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

Regional governments or local authorities

 

8.9

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

7.1

 

0.2

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

Public sector entities

 

11.7

 

4.9

 

0.1

 

4.8

 

-

 

8.2

 

4.0

 

-

 

4.0

 

-

 

Securitisation positions

 

 

15.8

 

0.5

 

-

 

-

 

0.5

 

2.7

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

Total

 

413.2

 

72.7

 

55.3

 

16.9

 

0.5

 

380.0

 

84.3

 

67.1

 

17.2

 

-

 

1 This table includes both on- and off-balance sheet exposures.

2 Deferred tax assets are excluded from the exposure.

3 Equities are excluded from the exposure.

Table 40: IRB - Effect on RWA of credit derivatives used as CRM techniques (CR7)

 

 

At 31 Dec

 

 

2019

2018

 

 

Pre-credit derivatives RWAs

ActualRWAs

Pre-credit derivativesRWAs

ActualRWAs

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Exposures under FIRB

32.3

 

32.3

 

30.5

 

30.5

 

3

Institutions

0.2

 

0.2

 

0.2

 

0.2

 

6

Corporates - other

32.1

 

32.1

 

30.3

 

30.3

 

7

Exposures under AIRB

467.1

 

465.9

480.0

 

479.0

 

8

Central governments and central banks

36.3

 

36.3

 

36.9

 

36.9

 

9

Institutions

10.8

 

10.8

 

14.2

 

14.2

 

11

Corporates - specialised lending

26.8

 

26.8

 

27.0

 

27.0

 

12

Corporates - other

302.1

 

300.9

 

319.1

 

318.1

 

13

Retail - Secured by real estate SMEs

1.5

 

1.5

 

1.8

 

1.8

 

14

Retail - Secured by real estate non-SMEs

40.4

 

40.4

 

37.2

 

37.2

 

15

Retail - Qualifying revolving

18.8

 

18.8

 

17.3

 

17.3

 

16

Retail - Other SMEs

4.7

 

4.7

 

4.8

 

4.8

 

17

Retail - Other non-SMEs

12.4

 

12.4

 

10.9

 

10.9

 

19

Other non-credit obligation assets

13.3

 

13.3

 

10.8

 

10.8

 

20

Total

499.4

 

498.2

 

510.5

 

509.5

 

 

Global risk

Qualitative disclosures on banks' use of external credit ratings under the standardised approach for credit risk

The standardised approach is applied where exposures do not qualify for use of an IRB approach and/or where an exemption from IRB has been granted. The standardised approach requires banks to use risk assessments prepared by external credit assessment institutions ('ECAIs') or ECAs to determine the risk weightings applied to rated counterparties.

ECAI risk assessments are used within the Group as part of the determination of risk weightings for the following classes of exposure:

• central governments and central banks;

• regional governments and local authorities;

• institutions;

• corporates;

• securitisation positions; and

• short-term claims on institutions and corporates.

We have nominated three ECAIs for this purpose - Moody's Investor Service ('Moody's'), Standard and Poor's rating agency ('S&P') and Fitch Ratings ('Fitch'). In addition to this, we use DBRS ratings specifically for securitisation positions. We have not nominated any ECAs.

Data files of external ratings from the nominated ECAIs are matched with customer records in our centralised credit database.

When calculating the risk-weighted value of an exposure using ECAI risk assessments, risk systems identify the customer in question and look up the available ratings in the central database according to the rating selection rules. The systems then apply the prescribed credit quality step mapping to derive from the rating the relevant risk weight.

All other exposure classes are assigned risk weightings as prescribed in the PRA's Rulebook.

Credit quality step

Moody's assessment

S&P's

assessment

Fitch's

assessment

DBRS assessment

1

Aaa to Aa3

AAA to AA-

AAA to AA-

AAA to AAL

2

A1 to A3

A+ to A-

A+ to A-

AH to AL

3

Baa1 to Baa3

BBB+ to BBB-

BBB+ to BBB-

BBBH to BBBL

4

Ba1 to Ba3

BB+ to BB-

BB+ to BB-

BBH to BBL

5

B1 to B3

B+ to B-

B+ to B-

BH to BL

6

Caa1 and below

CCC+ and below

CCC+ and below

CCCH and below

Exposures to, or guaranteed by, central governments and central banks of the European Economic Area ('EEA') states are risk-weighted at 0% provided that they are denominated and funded in local currency or qualify for that weight by virtue of their external rating.

The following table provides further detail on the risk weighting of our standardised non-counterparty credit exposures. For further detail on the risk weighting of our standardised counterparty credit risk exposures, refer to Table 50.

Table 41: Standardised approach - exposures by asset class and risk weight (CR5)

 

Risk weight ('RW%')

0%

2%

20%

35%

50%

70%

75%

100%

150%

250%

Deducted

Exposureamount (post-CCF and CRM)

Of which unrated

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

Asset classes1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Central governments or central banks

180.9

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

4.4

 

-

 

185.5

 

4.4

 

2

Regional governments or local authorities

3.8

 

-

 

3.9

 

-

 

0.9

 

-

 

-

 

0.3

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

8.9

 

0.3

 

3

Public sector entities

16.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

16.4

 

-

 

4

Multilateral development banks

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

5

International organisations

1.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1.6

 

-

 

6

Institutions

-

 

-

 

0.3

 

-

 

0.8

 

-

 

-

 

0.5

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1.6

 

0.3

 

7

Corporates

-

 

-

 

3.9

 

0.3

 

2.5

 

0.5

 

-

 

68.0

 

1.6

 

-

 

-

 

76.8

 

65.9

 

8

Retail

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

19.5

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

19.5

 

19.5

 

9

Secured by mortgage on immovable property

-

 

-

 

-

 

30.7

 

1.0

 

-

 

-

 

0.8

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

32.5

 

32.5

 

10

Exposures in default

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.6

 

1.0

 

-

 

-

 

3.6

 

3.6

 

11

Higher-risk categories

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

5.3

 

-

 

-

 

5.3

 

5.3

 

14

Collective investment undertakings

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.4

 

0.4

 

15

Equity

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

3.3

 

-

 

13.2

 

-

 

16.5

 

16.5

 

16

Other items

0.1

 

-

 

5.0

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

7.8

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

12.9

 

12.9

 

17

Total at 31 Dec 2019

202.9

 

-

 

13.2

 

31.0

 

5.2

 

0.5

 

19.5

 

83.8

 

7.9

 

17.6

 

-

 

381.6

 

161.6

 

1

Central governments or central banks

166.5

 

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

5.0

 

-

 

171.9

 

5.0

 

2

Regional governments or local authorities

2.8

 

-

 

3.5

 

-

 

0.5

 

-

 

-

 

0.3

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

7.1

 

0.5

 

3

Public sector entities

12.0

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

12.0

 

-

 

4

Multilateral development banks

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

5

International organisations

1.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1.6

 

-

 

6

Institutions

-

 

0.1

 

0.4

 

-

 

1.4

 

-

 

-

 

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.3

 

0.2

 

7

Corporates

-

 

-

 

3.6

 

0.3

 

3.4

 

0.5

 

-

 

75.6

 

0.8

 

-

 

-

 

84.2

 

59.1

 

8

Retail

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

19.9

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

19.9

 

19.9

 

9

Secured by mortgage on immovable property

-

 

-

 

-

 

30.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.7

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

30.9

 

30.9

 

10

Exposures in default

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.2

 

1.1

 

-

 

-

 

3.3

 

3.3

 

11

Higher-risk categories

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

4.6

 

-

 

-

 

4.6

 

4.6

 

14

Collective investment undertakings

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.6

 

0.6

 

15

Equity

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.8

 

-

 

12.9

 

-

 

15.7

 

15.7

 

16

Other items

-

 

-

 

5.9

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

5.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

11.3

 

11.3

 

17

Total at 31 Dec 2018

183.1

 

0.1

 

13.6

 

30.5

 

5.4

 

0.5

 

19.9

 

88.1

 

6.5

 

17.9

 

-

 

365.6

 

151.1

 

1 Securitisation positions are not included in this table.

 

Application of the IRB approach

Our Group IRB credit risk rating framework incorporates obligor propensity to default expressed in PD, and loss severity in the event of default expressed in EAD and LGD. These measures are used to calculate regulatory EL and capital requirements. They are also used with other inputs to inform rating assessments for the purposes of credit approval and many other purposes, for example:

• credit approval and monitoring: IRB models are used in the assessment of customer and portfolio risk in lending decisions;

• risk appetite: IRB measures are an important element in identifying risk exposure at customer, sector and portfolio level;

• pricing: IRB parameters are used in pricing tools for new transactions and reviews; and

• economic capital and portfolio management: IRB parameters are used in the economic capital model that has been implemented across HSBC.

Refer to Tables 69 and 71 in Appendix I for further information on our wholesale and retail IRB models.

Roll-out of the IRB approach

With the PRA's permission, we have adopted the advanced IRB approach for the majority of our business. At the end of 2019, portfolios in much of Europe, Asia and North America were on advanced IRB approaches. Others remain on the standardised or foundation approaches pending the development of models for the PRA's approval in line with our IRB roll-out plans where the primary focus is on corporate and retail exposures.

At 31 December 2019, 77% of the Group's exposures were treated under AIRB, 3% under FIRB and 20% under the standardised approach.

Refer to Table 70 in Appendix I for further detail on our IRB models including PD, LGD, RWA and exposure by country/territory.

EL and credit risk adjustments

We analyse credit loss experience in order to assess the performance of our risk measurement and control processes, and to inform our understanding of the implications for risk and capital management of dynamic changes occurring in the risk profile of our exposures.

When comparing regulatory EL with measures of ECL under IFRS 9, differences in the definition and scope of each should be considered. These can give rise to material differences in the way economic, business and methodological drivers are reflected quantitatively in the accounting and regulatory measures of loss.

In general, HSBC calculates ECL using three main components namely probability of default, loss given default, and exposure at default.

ECLs include impairment allowances (or provisions, against commitments and guarantees) calculated for a 12-month period ('12-month ECL'), for the remaining life of an exposure ('lifetime ECL'), and on financial assets that are considered to be in default or otherwise credit impaired. ECLs resulting from default events that are possible:

• within the next 12 months are recognised for financial instruments in stage 1; and

• beyond 12 months are recognised for financial instruments in stages 2 and 3.

An assessment of whether credit risk has increased significantly since initial recognition is performed at each reporting period by considering the change in the risk of default occurring over the remaining life of the financial instrument.

Unless identified at an earlier stage, all financial assets are deemed to have suffered a significant increase in credit risk when 30 days past due.

Change in ECL and other credit impairment charges represents the movement in the ECL during the year including write-offs, recoveries and foreign exchange. EL represents the one-year regulatory expected loss accumulated in the book at the balance sheet date.

Credit risk adjustments ('CRAs') encompass the impairment allowances or provisions balances, and changes in ECL and other credit impairment charges.

Table 72 in Appendix I sets out for IRB credit exposures the EL, CRA balances and actual loss experience reflected in the charges for CRAs.

HSBC leverages the Basel IRB framework where possible, with recalibration to meet the differing IFRS 9 requirements as follows:

 

 

 

PD

Through the cycle (represents long-run average PD throughout a full economic cycle)

The definition of default includes a backstop of 90+ days past due, although this has been modified to 180+ days past due for some portfolios, particularly UK and US mortgages

Point in time (based on current conditions, adjusted to take into account estimates of future conditions that will impact PD)

Default backstop of 90+ days past due for all portfolios

EAD

Cannot be lower than current balance

Amortisation captured for term products

LGD

Downturn LGD (consistent with losses we would expect to suffer during a severe but plausible economic downturn)

Regulatory floors may apply to mitigate risk of underestimating downturn LGD due to lack of historical data

Discounted using cost of capital

All collection costs included

Expected LGD (based on estimate of loss given default including the expected impact of future economic conditions such as changes in value of collateral)

No floors

Discounted using the original effective interest rate of the loan

Only costs associated with obtaining/selling collateral included

Other

 

Discounted back from point of default to balance sheet date

 

 

Wholesale risk

The wholesale risk rating system

This section describes how we operate our credit risk analytical models and use IRB metrics in the wholesale customer business.

PDs for wholesale customer segments (that is central governments and central banks, financial institutions and corporate customers) and for certain individually assessed personal customers are derived from a customer risk rating ('CRR') master scale of 23 grades. Of these, 21 are non-default grades representing varying degrees of strength of financial condition, and two are default grades. Each CRR has a PD range associated with it as well as a mid-point PD.

The score generated by a credit risk rating model for the obligor is mapped to a corresponding PD and master-scale CRR. The CRR is then reviewed by a credit approver who, taking into account information such as the most recent events and market data, makes the final decision on the rating. The rating assigned reflects the approver's overall view of the obligor's credit standing.

The mid-point PD associated with the finally assigned CRR is then used in the regulatory capital calculation.

Relationship managers may propose a different CRR from that indicated through an override process which must be approved by the Credit function. Overrides for each model are recorded and monitored as part of the model management process.

The CRR is assigned at an obligor level, which means that separate exposures to the same obligor are generally subject to a single, consistent rating. Unfunded credit risk mitigants, such as guarantees, may also influence the final assignment of a CRR to an obligor. The effect of unfunded risk mitigants is considered for IRB and standardised approaches in Table 39.

If an obligor is in default on any material credit obligation to the Group, all of the obligor's facilities from the Group are considered to be in default.

Under the IRB approach, obligors are grouped into grades that have similar PD or anticipated default frequency. The anticipated default frequency may be estimated using all relevant information at the relevant date (PIT rating system) or be free of the effects of the credit cycle (TTC rating system).

We generally utilise a hybrid approach of PIT and through the cycle ('TTC'). That is, while models are calibrated to long-run default rates, obligor ratings are reviewed annually, or more frequently if necessary, to reflect changes in their circumstances and/or their economic operating environment.

Our policy requires approvers to downgrade ratings on expectations, but to upgrade them only on performance. This leads to expected defaults typically exceeding actual defaults.

For EAD and LGD estimation, operating entities are permitted, subject to overview by Group Risk, to use their own modelling approaches to suit conditions in their jurisdictions. Group Risk provides co-ordination, benchmarks, and promotion of best practice on EAD and LGD estimation.

EAD is estimated to a 12-month forward time horizon and represents the current exposure, plus an estimate for future increases in exposure and the realisation of contingent exposures post-default.

LGD is based on the effects of facility and collateral structure on outcomes post-default. This includes such factors as the type of client, the facility seniority, the type and value of collateral, past recovery experience and priority under law. It is expressed as a percentage of EAD.

Wholesale models

To determine credit ratings for the different types of wholesale obligor, multiple models and scorecards are used for PD, LGD, and EAD. These models may be differentiated by region, customer segment and/or customer size. For example, we have separate PD models for all of our key customer segments, including sovereigns, financial institutions, and large-, medium- and small-sized corporates.

Global PD models have been developed for asset classes, or clearly identifiable segments of asset classes, where the customer relationship is managed globally; for example, sovereigns, financial institutions and the largest corporate clients that typically operate internationally.

Local PD models, specific to a particular country, region, or sector, are developed for other obligors. These include corporate clients when they show distinct characteristics in common in a particular geography.

The two major drivers of model methodology are the nature of the portfolio and the availability of internal or external data on historical defaults and risk factors. For some historically low-default portfolios, e.g. sovereign and financial institutions, a model will rely more heavily on external data and/or the input of an expert panel. Where sufficient data is available, models are built on a statistical basis, although the input of expert judgement may still form an important part of the overall model development methodology.

Most LGD and EAD models are developed according to local circumstances, considering legal and procedural differences in the recovery and workout processes. Our approach to EAD and LGD also encompasses global models for central governments and central banks, and for institutions, as exposures to these customer types are managed centrally by Global Risk. The PRA requires all firms to apply an LGD floor of 45% for senior unsecured exposure to sovereign entities. This floor was applied to reflect the relatively few loss observations across all firms in relation to these obligors. This floor is applied for the purposes of regulatory capital reporting.

The PRA has published guidance on the appropriateness of LGD models for low default portfolios. It states there should be at least 20 defaults per country per collateral type for LGD models to be approved. Where there are insufficient defaults, an LGD floor will be applied. As a result, in 2019, we continued to apply LGD floors for our banks portfolio and some Asian corporate portfolios where there were insufficient loss observations.

The PRA has also indicated that it considers income-producing real estate to be an asset class that would be difficult to model. As a result, RWAs for our UK CRE portfolio and US income-producing CRE portfolio are calculated using the supervisory slotting approach. Under the supervisory slotting approach the bank allocates exposures to one of five categories. Each category then receives a fixed pre-determined RWA and EL percentage.

Local models for the corporate exposure class are developed using various data inputs, including collateral information and geography (for LGD) and product type (for EAD). The most material corporate models are the UK and Asian models, all of which are developed using more than 10 years' data. The LGD models are calibrated to a period of credit stress or downturn in economic conditions.

None of our EAD models is calibrated for a downturn, as analysis shows that utilisation decreases during a downturn because credit stress is accompanied by more intensive limit monitoring and facility reduction.

Table 42 sets out the key characteristics of the significant wholesale credit risk models that drive the capital calculation split by regulatory wholesale asset class, with their associated RWAs, including the number of models for each component, the model method or approach and the number of years of loss data used.

Table 42: Wholesale IRB credit risk models

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sovereign

Central government and central banks, Institutions, Corporates - Others

36.3

PD

1

A shadow rating approach that includes macroeconomic and political factors, constrained with expert judgement.

>10

No

LGD

1

An unsecured model built on assessment of structural factors that influence the country's long-term economic performance. For unsecured LGD, a floor of 45% is applied.

8

Floored at Foundation IRB

EAD

1

A cross-classification model that uses both internal data and expert judgement, as well as information on similar exposure types from other asset classes.

8

EAD must be at least equal to the current utilisation of the balance at account level

Banking institutions

Institutions

11.0

PD

1

A statistical model that combines quantitative analysis on financial information with expert inputs and macroeconomic factors.

10

PD >0.03%

LGD

1

A quantitative model that produces both downturn and expected LGD. Several securities types are included in the model to recognise collateral in the LGD calculation. For unsecured LGD, a floor of 45% is applied.

10

Floored at Foundation IRB

EAD

1

A quantitative model that assigns credit conversion factors ('CCF') taking into account product types and committed/uncommitted indicator to calculate EAD using current utilisation and available headroom.

10

EAD must be at least equal to the current utilisation of the balance at account level

Corporates¹

Corporates - Other, institutions

337.2

 

 

 

 

 

Large corporates

 

PD

1

A statistical model built on 15 years of data. The model uses financial information, macroeconomic information and market-driven data, and is complemented by a qualitative assessment.

15

PD >0.03%

Regional corporates

 

PD

10

Corporates that fall below the global large corporate threshold are rated through regional/local PD models, which reflect regional/local circumstances. These models use financial information, behavioural data and qualitative information to derive a statistically built PD.

>10

 

Non-banks financial institutions

 

PD

10

Predominantly statistical models that combine quantitative analysis on financial information with expert inputs.

10

PD >0.03%

All corporates

 

LGD

7

Regional/local statistical models covering all corporates, including global large corporates, developed using historical loss/recovery data and various data inputs, including collateral information, customer type and geography.

>7

UK Floored at Foundation IRB

 

EAD

5

Regional/local statistical models covering all corporates, including global large corporates, developed using historical utilisation information and various data inputs, including product type and geography.

>7

EAD must be at least equal to the current utilisation of the balance at account level

1 Excludes specialised lending exposures subject to supervisory slotting approach (see table 75).

 

 

Table 43: IRB models - estimated and actual values (wholesale)¹

 

 

PD2

LGD3

EAD4

 

 

Estimated

Actuals

Estimated5

Actuals5

Estimated

Actuals

 

Footnotes

%

%

%

%

%

%

2019

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

- Sovereigns model

6

2.01

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

- Banks model

 

1.09

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

- Corporates models

7

1.53

 

1.05

 

33.23

 

25.37

 

0.42

 

0.31

 

2018

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

- Sovereigns model

6

2.37

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

- Banks model

 

1.31

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

- Corporates models

7

1.61

 

0.87

 

30.47

 

16.60

 

0.38

 

0.33

 

2017

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

- Sovereigns model

6

2.24

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

- Banks model

 

1.72

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

- Corporates models

7

1.72

 

0.96

 

27.75

 

17.50

 

0.39

 

0.36

 

1 Data represents an annual view, analysed at 30 September.

2 Estimated PD for all models in each asset class, calculated on the total number of obligors covered by the models. Actual numbers are the observed default rate in each asset class for the specified period.

3 Estimated and actual LGD represent defaulted populations. Average LGD values are EAD-weighted.

4 Expressed as a percentage of total EAD, which includes all defaulted and non-defaulted exposures for the relevant population.

5 Estimated LGD represents the EAD weighted average downturn LGD. In the current year, we have changed the methodology of computing actual LGD. Actual LGD represents the actual loss for defaults resolved in period divided by EAD of defaults resolved in the period. Prior period actual LGD has been restated.

6 The estimated PD excludes inactive sovereign obligors.

7 Covers the combined populations of the global large corporates model, all regional IRB models for large, medium and small corporates, and non-bank financial institutions. The estimated and observed PDs were calculated only for unique obligors.

Retail risk

Retail risk rating systems

Due to the different country-level portfolio performance characteristics and loss history, there are no global models for our retail portfolios. Across the Group, over 100 models are used with the PRA's approval under our IRB permission.

Table 44 sets out the key characteristics of significant retail credit risk models that drive the capital calculation, consistent with those shown in the previous year. The table presents regulatory retail asset class, the associated RWAs, the number of models for each component, the model method or approach and the number of years of loss data used. The RWAs of $47.7bn represent 61% of the total retail IRB RWA.

PD models are developed using statistical estimation based on a minimum of five years of historical data. The modelling approach is typically inherently TTC. Where models are developed based on a PIT approach (as in the UK), the model outputs become effectively TTC through the application of buffer or model adjustments as agreed with the PRA.

 

EAD models are also developed using at least five years of historical observations and typically adopt one of two approaches:

• For closed-end products without the facility for additional drawdowns, EAD is estimated as the outstanding balance of accounts at the time of observation.

• For products with the facility for additional drawdowns, EAD is estimated as the outstanding balance of accounts at the time of observation plus a credit conversion factor applied to the undrawn portion of the facility.

LGD estimates have more variation, particularly in respect of the time period that is used to quantify economic downturn assumptions.

Table 44: Retail IRB risk rating systems

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

UK HSBCresidentialmortgages

Retail- secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME

5.36

PD

1

Statistical model built on internal behavioural data and bureau information. Underlying PIT model is calibrated to the latest observed PD. An adjustment is then applied to generate the long-run PD based on a combination of historical misalignment of the underlying model and expert judgement.

7-10

PD floor of 0.03%

LGD

1

Component based model incorporating, 'possession given default', 'predicted shortfall' and 'time to possession'. A downturn adjustment is applied to each component including a 30% reduction from peak house valuation and a 10% adjustment to forced sale haircut.

>10

LGD floor of 10% at portfolio level

EAD

1

Logical model that uses the sum of balance at observation plus further unpaid interest that could accrue before default.

7-10

EAD must at least be equal to current balance

UK First Directresidentialmortgages

Retail- secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME

0.80

PD

1

Underlying PIT PD model is a segmented scorecard. An adjustment is then applied based on observed misalignment in the underlying model (with some additional conservatism applied).

7-10

PD floor of 0.03%

LGD

1

Component based model incorporating, 'possession given default', 'predicted shortfall' and 'time to possession'. A downturn adjustment is applied to each component including a 30% reduction from peak house valuation and a 10% adjustment to forced sale haircut.

>10

LGD floor of 10% at portfolio level

EAD

2

There are two separate EAD models - one for standard capital repayment mortgages and one for offset mortgages which offer a revolving loan facility.

7-10

EAD must at least be equal to current balance

UK HSBCcredit cards

Retail- qualifying revolving

3.02

PD

1

Statistical model built on internal behavioural data and bureau information. Underlying PIT model is calibrated to the latest observed PD. An adjustment is then applied to generate the long-run PD based on historical observed misalignment of the underlying model.

7-10

PD floor of 0.03%

LGD

1

Statistical model based on forecasting the amount of expected future recoveries, segmented by default status.

7-10

 

EAD

1

Statistical model that directly estimates EAD for different segments of the portfolio using either balance or limit as the key input.

7-10

EAD must at least be equal to current balance

UK HSBCpersonal loans

Retail- other non-SME

4.75

PD

1

Statistical model built on internal behavioural data and bureau information. Underlying PIT model is calibrated to the latest observed PD. An adjustment is then applied to generate the long-run PD based on historical observed misalignment of the underlying model.

7-10

PD floor of 0.03%

LGD

1

Statistical model based on forecasting the amount of expected future recoveries, segmented by default status.

7-10

 

EAD

1

EAD is equal to current balance as this provides a conservative estimate.

7-10

EAD must at least be equal to current balance

Table 44: Retail IRB risk rating systems (continued)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

UK business banking

Retail- other SME

3.28

PD

1

Statistical model built on internal behavioural data and bureau information. Underlying PIT model is calibrated to the latest observed PD. An adjustment is then applied to generate the long run PD based on historical observed misalignment of the underlying model.

7-10

PD floor of 0.03%

LGD

2

Two sets of models - one for secured exposures and another for unsecured exposures. The secured model uses the value to loan as a key component for estimation and the unsecured model estimates the amount of future recoveries and undrawn portion.

7-10

 

EAD

1

Statistical model using segmentation according to limit and utilisation and estimation of the undrawn exposure.

7-10

EAD must at least be equal to current balance

Hong KongHSBC personal residential mortgages2

Retail- secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME

12.34

PD

2

Statistical model built on internal behavioural data and bureau information, and calibrated to a long-run default rate.

>10

PD floor of 0.03%

LGD

2

Statistical model based on estimate of loss incurred over a recovery period derived from historical data with downturn LGD based on the worst observed default rate.

>10

LGD floor of 10% at portfolio level

EAD

2

Rule-based calculation based on current balance, which provides a conservative estimate of EAD.

>10

EAD must at least be equal to current balance

Hong KongHang Seng personal residential mortgages

Retail- secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME

7.52

PD

2

Statistical model built on internal behavioural data, and calibrated to a long-run default rate.

>10

PD floor of 0.03%

LGD

2

Two statistical models and one historical average model based on estimates of loss incurred over a recovery period derived from historical data with a downturn adjustment.

>10

LGD floor of 10% at portfolio level

EAD

2

Rule-based calculation based on current balance, which provides a conservative estimate of EAD.

>10

EAD must at least be equal to current balance

Hong KongHSBC creditcards

Retail- qualifying revolving

4.08

PD

1

Statistical model built on internal behavioural data and bureau information, and calibrated to a long-run default rate.

>10

PD floor of 0.03%

LGD

1

Statistical model based on forecasting the amount of expected losses. Downturn LGD derived using data from the period with the highest default rate.

>10

 

EAD

1

Statistical model that derives a credit utilisation which is used to estimate EAD.

>10

EAD must at least be equal to current balance

Hong KongHSBC personal instalment loans

Retail- other non-SME

1.50

PD

1

Statistical model built on internal behavioural data and bureau information, and calibrated to a long-run default rate.

>10

PD floor of 0.03%

LGD

1

Statistical model based on forecasting the amount of expected future losses. Downturn LGD derived using data from the period with the highest default rate.

>10

 

EAD

1

Statistical model that derives a credit conversion factor to determine the proportion of undrawn limit to be added to the balance at observation.

>10

EAD must at least be equal to current balance

US HSBC personal first lien residential mortgages3

Retail- secured by mortgages on immovable property non-SME

5.04

PD

1

Statistical model built on internal behavioural data and bureau information, and calibrated to a long-run default rate.

>10

PD floor of 0.03% 

LGD

1

Statistical model based on identifying the main risk drivers of loss and recovery and grouping them into homogeneous pools. Downturn LGD is derived based on the peak default rate observed. Additional assumptions and estimations are made on incomplete workouts.

>10

LGD floor of 10% at portfolio level 

EAD

1

Rule-based calculation based on current balance which provides a conservative estimate of EAD.

>10

EAD must at least be equal to current balance 

 

1 Defined as the number of years of historical data used in model development and estimation.

2 The Hong Kong Monetary Authority ('HKMA') applies a risk weight floor of 25% to all residential mortgages booked after 19 May 2017 (previously 15%).

3 In US mortgage business, first lien is a primary claim on a property that takes precedence over all subsequent claims and will be paid first from the proceeds in case of the property's foreclosure sale.

Retail credit models

Given the large number of retail IRB models globally, we disclose information on our significant local models. The actual and estimated values are derived from local model monitoring and calibration processes. Within the discipline of our global modelling policies, our analytics teams adopt back-testing criteria specific to local conditions in order to assess the accuracy of their models.

Table 45 presents estimated and actual values from the back-testing of significant IRB models covering portfolios in the UK, Hong Kong, and the residential mortgage portfolio in the US. The most recent three years have been included for comparative purposes.

In the table below:

• PD presented is expressed on an obligor count basis consisting of non-defaulted obligors at the time of observation and

• LGD and EAD refer to observations for the defaulted population.

The LGD values represent the amount of loss as a percentage of EAD, and are calculated based on defaulted accounts that were fully resolved or have completed the modelled recovery outcome period at the reporting date. The EAD values of the defaulted exposures are presented as a percentage of the total EAD, which includes all defaulted and non-defaulted exposures for the relevant population. The regulatory PD and LGD floors (0.03% and 10% respectively) are only applied during final capital calculation and are not reflected in the estimates below.

For our UK residential mortgage portfolios, the estimates include required regulatory downturn adjustments. In conducting the back-testing, our UK residential mortgage LGD models consider repossession rates over a 36-month period starting at the date of default. For both our HSBC and First Direct branded residential mortgages, estimates and actual values for LGD remained low and stable in 2019.

The Hong Kong estimated LGD values in Table 45 include required stressed factors to reflect downturn conditions. The LGD models for our Hong Kong HSBC and Hang Seng residential mortgage portfolios use a recovery outcome period of 24 months starting at the date of default. For both portfolios, LGD estimates remain higher than the calculated actual values but below the 10% regulatory floor.

The US estimates in Table 45 include downturn adjustments and model overlays agreed with the PRA. The LGD models use a recovery outcome period of 36 months, reflecting the recovery process due to foreclosure moratoria. LGD estimates and actual values remained stable in 2019.

Table 45: IRB models - estimated and actual values (retail)¹

 

PD

LGD

EAD

 

Estimated

Actuals

Estimated

Actuals

Estimated

Actuals

 

%

%

%

%

%

%

2019

 

 

 

 

 

 

UK

 

 

 

 

 

 

- HSBC residential mortgage

0.33

 

0.29

 

9.17

 

0.32

 

0.29

 

0.28

 

- FD residential mortgages

0.42

 

0.34

 

7.42

 

1.85

 

0.93

 

0.74

 

- HSBC credit card

1.06

 

1.05

 

91.29

 

88.58

 

1.51

 

1.48

 

- HSBC personal loans

2.54

 

2.19

 

83.61

 

61.79

 

2.26

 

2.10

 

- Business Banking (Retail SME)

2.95

 

2.92

 

78.23

 

55.48

 

2.54

 

2.31

 

Hong Kong

 

 

 

 

 

 

- HSBC personal residential mortgage

0.60

 

0.03

 

1.58

 

1.21

 

0.02

 

0.02

 

- Hang Seng personal residential mortgage

0.37

 

0.10

 

4.52

 

1.03

 

0.07

 

0.07

 

- HSBC credit card

0.53

 

0.20

 

89.06

 

78.37

 

0.38

 

0.40

 

- HSBC personal instalment loans

2.13

 

1.31

 

88.92

 

84.70

 

1.06

 

0.92

 

US - HSBC personal first lien residential mortgage

1.54

 

0.54

 

51.01

 

18.24

 

0.30

 

0.29

 

2018

 

 

 

 

 

 

UK

 

 

 

 

 

 

- HSBC residential mortgage

0.40

 

0.27

 

9.60

 

0.38

 

0.27

 

0.25

 

- FD residential mortgages

0.45

 

0.38

 

8.19

 

2.07

 

1.05

 

0.86

 

- HSBC credit card

1.01

 

0.97

 

88.75

 

85.15

 

1.42

 

1.40

 

- HSBC personal loans

2.13

 

1.88

 

84.84

 

87.97

 

1.83

 

1.75

 

- Business Banking (Retail SME)

2.83

 

2.86

 

78.56

 

71.56

 

2.30

 

2.09

 

Hong Kong

 

 

 

 

 

 

- HSBC personal residential mortgage

0.70

 

0.02

 

2.87

 

1.70

 

0.02

 

0.02

 

- Hang Seng personal residential mortgage

0.39

 

0.09

 

5.99

 

0.84

 

0.08

 

0.08

 

- HSBC credit card

0.57

 

0.24

 

87.92

 

75.98

 

0.40

 

0.42

 

- HSBC personal instalment loans

2.27

 

1.47

 

89.01

 

83.73

 

1.24

 

1.10

 

US - HSBC personal first lien residential mortgage

1.71

 

0.69

 

52.06

 

21.69

 

0.43

 

0.42

 

2017

 

 

 

 

 

 

UK

 

 

 

 

 

 

- HSBC residential mortgage

0.44

 

0.28

 

9.74

 

0.88

 

0.26

 

0.24

 

- FD residential mortgages

0.48

 

0.41

 

2.11

 

0.45

 

1.09

 

0.91

 

- HSBC credit card

0.92

 

0.77

 

90.86

 

85.68

 

1.10

 

1.07

 

- HSBC personal loans

1.94

 

1.62

 

87.77

 

79.90

 

1.58

 

1.50

 

- Business Banking (Retail SME)

2.57

 

2.64

 

73.87

 

70.25

 

1.90

 

1.51

 

Hong Kong

 

 

 

 

 

 

- HSBC personal residential mortgage

0.72

 

0.04

 

1.43

 

0.14

 

0.05

 

0.05

 

- Hang Seng personal residential mortgage

0.42

 

0.14

 

5.18

 

0.59

 

0.14

 

0.14

 

- HSBC credit card

0.65

 

0.28

 

89.33

 

76.11

 

0.47

 

0.50

 

- HSBC personal instalment loans

2.34

 

1.51

 

89.07

 

80.05

 

1.25

 

1.14

 

US - HSBC personal first lien residential mortgage

1.91

 

0.80

 

53.27

 

22.22

 

0.37

 

0.36

 

1 Data represents an annual view, analysed at 30 September.

Model performance

Model validation is subject to global internal standards designed to support a comprehensive quantitative and qualitative process within a cycle of model monitoring and validation that includes:

• investigation of model stability;

• measuring model performance by comparing the model's outputs against actual outcomes; and

• reviewing model use within the business, e.g. user input data quality, override activity and the assessment of results from key controls around the usage of the rating system as a whole within the overall credit process.

Models are monitored against a series of metrics and triggers approved by the appropriate governance committee. Model performance metrics, and any material remedial actions in the event of a trigger breach, are reported at the Wholesale and RBWM MOCs. We also disclose model performance reports for our IRB models to our lead regulator, the PRA, quarterly. We are designing a new target operating model for the MRM function, which sets model risk management policy, standards and model risk appetite.

Further information is available on page 146 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

A large number of models are used within the Group, and data at individual model level is, in most cases, immaterial in the context of the overall Group. We therefore disclose data covering most wholesale models, including corporate models on an aggregated basis, and on the significant retail models.

Tables 46 and 47 below validate the reliability of PD calculations by comparing the PD used in IRB calculations with actual default experience. In Table 47, a customer's PD is observed at a PIT and their default or non-default status in the following one-year period is recorded against that PD grade.

Table 46: Wholesale IRB exposure - back-testing of probability of default (PD) per portfolio¹ (CR9)

PD range

External rating equivalent (S&P)

External rating equivalent (Moody's)

External rating equivalent (Fitch)

Weighted average PD %

Arithmetic average PD by obligors %

Number of obligors

Defaulted obligors in the year

of which: new defaulted obligors in the year

Average historical annual default rate %

End of previous year3

End of the year

2019

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sovereigns²

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0.00 to

AAA to A-

Aaa to Baa1

AAA to BBB+

0.02

 

0.04

 

53

 

54

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.15 to

BBB+

Baa2

BBB

0.22

 

0.22

 

6

 

7

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.25 to

BBB

Baa3

BBB-

0.37

 

0.37

 

8

 

8

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.50 to

BBB-

Baa3

BBB-

0.63

 

0.63

 

7

 

6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.75 to

BB+ to BB-

Ba1 to B1

BB+ to B+

2.05

 

1.38

 

21

 

16

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.5 to

B+ to B-

B2 to Caa1

B to CCC+

5.65

 

4.81

 

21

 

22

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

10.00 to

CCC+ to C

Caa1 to C

CCC to C

36.00

 

17.33

 

6

 

7

 

-

 

-

 

1.79

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Banks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0.00 to

AAA to A-

Aaa to Baa1

AAA to BBB+

0.05

 

0.08

 

268

 

287

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.15 to

BBB+

Baa2

BBB

0.22

 

0.22

 

62

 

71

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.25 to

BBB

Baa3

BBB-

0.37

 

0.37

 

61

 

49

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.50 to

BBB-

Baa3

BBB-

0.63

 

0.63

 

47

 

50

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.75 to

BB+ to BB-

Ba1 to B1

BB+ to B+

1.11

 

1.31

 

102

 

91

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.5 to

B+ to B-

B2 to Caa1

B to CCC+

4.17

 

4.59

 

54

 

42

 

-

 

-

 

0.09

 

10.00 to

CCC+ to C

Caa1 to C

CCC to C

12.67

 

11.77

 

17

 

24

 

-

 

-

 

1.40

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Corporates

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0.00 to

AAA to A-

Aaa to Baa1

AAA to BBB+

0.08

 

0.11

 

12,916

 

13,575

 

12

 

-

 

0.03

 

0.15 to

BBB+

Baa2

BBB

0.22

 

0.22

 

12,147

 

12,808

 

19

 

-

 

0.11

 

0.25 to

BBB

Baa3

BBB-

0.37

 

0.37

 

11,998

 

12,911

 

24

 

-

 

0.23

 

0.50 to

BBB-

Baa3

BBB-

0.63

 

0.63

 

10,844

 

11,926

 

29

 

3

 

0.41

 

0.75 to

BB+ to BB-

Ba1 to B1

BB+ to B+

1.38

 

1.42

 

33,473

 

32,750

 

262

 

36

 

0.86

 

2.5 to

B+ to B-

B2 to Caa1

B to CCC+

4.15

 

4.25

 

12,978

 

12,999

 

556

 

77

 

3.05

 

10.00 to

CCC+ to C

Caa1 to C

CCC to C

21.94

 

18.42

 

1,571

 

1,723

 

234

 

16

 

13.29

 

 

 

Table 46: Wholesale IRB exposure - back-testing of probability of default (PD) per portfolio¹ (CR9) (continued)

PD range

External rating equivalent (S&P)

External rating equivalent (Moody's)

External rating equivalent (Fitch)

Weighted average PD %

Arithmetic average PD by obligors %

Number of obligors

Defaulted obligors in the year

of which: new defaulted obligors in the year

Average historical annual default rate %

End of previous year3

End of the year

2018

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sovereigns2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0.00 to

AAA to BBB

Aaa to Baa2

AAA to BBB

0.02

 

0.04

 

53

 

53

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.15 to

BBB-

Baa3

BBB-

0.22

 

0.22

 

7

 

6

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.25 to

BBB-

Baa3

BBB-

0.37

 

0.37

 

5

 

8

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.50 to

BB+ to BB

Ba1 to Ba2

BB+ to BB

0.63

 

0.63

 

7

 

7

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.75 to

BB- to B-

Ba3 to B2

BB- to B-

1.44

 

1.32

 

23

 

21

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.5 to

B to B-

B2 to Caa1

CCC+ to CCC

3.65

 

4.92

 

21

 

21

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

10.00 to

B- to C

Caa1 to C

CCC to C

10.00

 

18.75

 

8

 

6

 

-

 

-

 

1.79

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Banks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0.00 to

AAA to A-

Aaa to Baa1

AAA to BBB+

0.05

 

0.08

 

258

 

268

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.15 to

BBB+

Baa2

BBB

0.22

 

0.22

 

62

 

62

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.25 to

BBB

Baa3

BBB-

0.37

 

0.37

 

48

 

61

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.50 to

BBB-

Baa3

BBB-

0.63

 

0.63

 

58

 

47

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.75 to

BB+ to BB-

Ba1 to B1

BB+ to B+

1.15

 

1.36

 

119

 

102

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.5 to

B+ to B-

B2 to Caa1

B to CCC+

4.10

 

4.54

 

75

 

54

 

-

 

-

 

0.17

 

10.00 to

CCC+ to C

Caa1 to C

CCC to C

15.62

 

13.61

 

18

 

17

 

-

 

-

 

1.55

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Corporates

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0.00 to

AAA to A-

Aaa to Baa1

AAA to BBB+

0.09

 

0.10

 

12,935

 

13,750

 

6

 

-

 

0.02

 

0.15 to

BBB+

Baa2

BBB

0.22

 

0.22

 

12,344

 

12,741

 

4

 

-

 

0.11

 

0.25 to

BBB

Baa3

BBB-

0.37

 

0.37

 

12,779

 

12,794

 

9

 

-

 

0.22

 

0.50 to

BBB-

Baa3

BBB-

0.63

 

0.63

 

11,153

 

11,616

 

27

 

1

 

0.40

 

0.75 to

BB+ to BB-

Ba1 to B1

BB+ to B+

1.35

 

1.44

 

36,542

 

35,581

 

275

 

27

 

0.88

 

2.5 to

B+ to B-

B2 to Caa1

B to CCC+

4.23

 

4.32

 

13,712

 

14,023

 

379

 

42

 

2.93

 

10.00 to

CCC+ to C

Caa1 to C

CCC to C

18.81

 

19.65

 

1,814

 

1,762

 

269

 

21

 

12.93

 

1 Data represents an annual view, analysed at 30 September.

2 The CRR to external ratings mapping has been updated for Sovereign portfolios to reflect the current CRR master scale.

3 Back-testing is conducted on the basis of the opening count of obligors not in default in each year. Obligors who default during the year are excluded from the opening count for the following year.

 

Table 47: Retail IRB exposure - back-testing of probability of default (PD) per portfolio¹ (CR9)

PD range

Weighted average PD

Arithmetic average PD by obligors

Number of obligors

Defaulted obligors in the year

of which: new defaulted obligors in the year

Average

historical

annual default rate

End of previous year2

End of the year

2019

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Retail - Secured by real estate non-SME

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0.00 to

0.06

 

0.06

 

727,744

 

762,489

 

269

 

2

 

0.04

 

0.15 to

0.19

 

0.19

 

65,933

 

71,284

 

63

 

2

 

0.09

 

0.25 to

0.35

 

0.35

 

65,548

 

70,656

 

99

 

2

 

0.13

 

0.50 to

0.59

 

0.59

 

26,743

 

27,154

 

65

 

-

 

0.21

 

0.75 to

1.31

 

1.38

 

54,654

 

61,885

 

245

 

2

 

0.38

 

2.50 to

4.19

 

4.25

 

16,580

 

15,967

 

358

 

-

 

1.80

 

10.00 to

26.39

 

21.52

 

6,301

 

3,852

 

1,196

 

16

 

17.19

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Retail - qualifying revolving

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0.00 to

0.06

 

0.06

 

3,219,726

 

3,328,050

 

1,483

 

67

 

0.05

 

0.15 to

0.19

 

0.19

 

776,922

 

811,125

 

796

 

31

 

0.10

 

0.25 to

0.36

 

0.36

 

692,096

 

737,010

 

1,365

 

46

 

0.20

 

0.50 to

0.61

 

0.62

 

330,981

 

349,945

 

1,174

 

44

 

0.35

 

0.75 to

1.35

 

1.33

 

717,012

 

755,881

 

6,253

 

196

 

0.81

 

2.50 to

4.58

 

4.35

 

216,958

 

228,896

 

7,665

 

279

 

3.25

 

10.00 to

29.90

 

29.24

 

60,952

 

47,671

 

17,756

 

33

 

22.75

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Retail - other non-SME

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0.00 to

0.13

 

0.13

 

34,493

 

46,360

 

57

 

14

 

0.15

 

0.15 to

0.18

 

0.17

 

119,005

 

108,191

 

220

 

25

 

0.14

 

0.25 to

0.39

 

0.39

 

70,521

 

130,566

 

303

 

127

 

0.27

 

0.50 to

0.58

 

0.58

 

35,026

 

57,295

 

301

 

93

 

0.52

 

0.75 to

1.33

 

1.34

 

199,214

 

185,914

 

2,631

 

444

 

1.18

 

2.50 to

4.23

 

4.54

 

77,263

 

61,559

 

3,563

 

265

 

3.70

 

10.00 to

37.52

 

37.19

 

18,396

 

8,894

 

5,864

 

22

 

34.92

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Retail - other SME

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0.00 to

0.10

 

0.10

 

59,060

 

57,074

 

29

 

-

 

0.05

 

0.15 to

0.21

 

0.20

 

49,952

 

49,148

 

52

 

2

 

0.16

 

0.25 to

0.39

 

0.38

 

120,086

 

118,700

 

414

 

7

 

0.34

 

0.50 to

0.61

 

0.61

 

97,307

 

99,368

 

578

 

6

 

0.63

 

0.75 to

1.51

 

1.34

 

269,122

 

273,060

 

3,736

 

96

 

1.43

 

2.50 to

4.79

 

4.68

 

159,675

 

155,791

 

7,440

 

212

 

4.06

 

10.00 to

20.75

 

22.90

 

50,282

 

42,171

 

11,718

 

94

 

17.16

 

 

 

Table 47: Retail IRB exposure - back-testing of probability of default (PD) per portfolio¹ (CR9) (continued)

PD range

Weighted average PD

Arithmetic average PD by obligors

Number of obligors

Defaulted obligors in the year

of which: new defaulted obligors in the year

Average

historical

annual default

rate

End of previous year2

End of the year

2018

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Retail - Secured by real estate non-SME

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0.00 to

0.06

 

0.06

 

696,972

 

738,577

 

259

 

3

 

0.03

 

0.15 to

0.19

 

0.19

 

60,467

 

60,748

 

59

 

-

 

0.08

 

0.25 to

0.35

 

0.34

 

65,972

 

64,896

 

98

 

2

 

0.13

 

0.50 to

0.60

 

0.60

 

26,090

 

24,446

 

59

 

-

 

0.20

 

0.75 to

1.33

 

1.35

 

58,184

 

53,707

 

237

 

1

 

0.41

 

2.50 to

4.33

 

4.32

 

18,547

 

15,669

 

332

 

1

 

1.97

 

10.00 to

26.08

 

23.26

 

7,612

 

4,883

 

1,254

 

9

 

18.79

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Retail - qualifying revolving

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0.00 to

0.06

 

0.06

 

3,142,314

 

3,246,838

 

1,492

 

72

 

0.05

 

0.15 to

0.19

 

0.19

 

727,005

 

756,129

 

747

 

18

 

0.10

 

0.25 to

0.36

 

0.36

 

660,076

 

690,157

 

1,277

 

38

 

0.20

 

0.50 to

0.61

 

0.62

 

310,930

 

334,756

 

1,120

 

23

 

0.35

 

0.75 to

1.35

 

1.32

 

661,414

 

723,761

 

5,871

 

97

 

0.81

 

2.50 to

4.60

 

4.41

 

205,789

 

224,910

 

7,319

 

78

 

3.11

 

10.00 to

29.12

 

28.71

 

68,365

 

48,267

 

16,375

 

11

 

21.00

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Retail - other non-SME

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0.00 to

0.09

 

0.08

 

124,924

 

146,849

 

267

 

7

 

0.15

 

0.15 to

0.19

 

0.19

 

79,492

 

89,056

 

145

 

5

 

0.14

 

0.25 to

0.36

 

0.36

 

114,634

 

127,085

 

395

 

23

 

0.27

 

0.50 to

0.61

 

0.62

 

39,397

 

40,862

 

213

 

13

 

0.52

 

0.75 to

1.35

 

1.40

 

97,623

 

96,793

 

1,345

 

45

 

1.23

 

2.50 to

4.52

 

4.82

 

53,464

 

47,449

 

2,108

 

48

 

3.51

 

10.00 to

41.84

 

40.92

 

15,141

 

7,090

 

5,535

 

6

 

35.84

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Retail - other SME

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

0.00 to

0.10

 

0.10

 

61,271

 

59,701

 

18

 

-

 

0.06

 

0.15 to

0.20

 

0.19

 

51,337

 

50,498

 

78

 

1

 

0.18

 

0.25 to

0.38

 

0.36

 

114,069

 

113,307

 

382

 

3

 

0.38

 

0.50 to

0.61

 

0.61

 

120,311

 

121,038

 

687

 

4

 

0.69

 

0.75 to

1.54

 

1.37

 

292,313

 

289,602

 

4,083

 

86

 

1.55

 

2.50 to

4.86

 

4.80

 

155,113

 

145,309

 

7,558

 

117

 

4.21

 

10.00 to

19.62

 

22.47

 

49,944

 

42,946

 

11,563

 

29

 

17.07

 

1 Data represents an annual view, analysed at 30 September.

2 Back-testing is conducted on the basis of the opening count of obligors not in default in each year. Obligors who default during the year are excluded from the opening count for the following year.

 

Counterparty credit risk

Counterparty credit risk management

Counterparty credit risk ('CCR') arises for derivatives and SFTs. It is calculated in both the trading and non-trading books, and is the risk that a counterparty may default before settlement of the transaction. CCR is generated primarily in our wholesale global businesses.

Four approaches may be used under CRD IV to calculate exposure values for CCR: mark-to-market, original exposure, standardised and IMM. Exposure values calculated under these approaches are used to determine RWAs. Across the Group, we use the mark-to-market and IMM approaches.

Under the mark-to-market approach, the EAD is calculated as current exposure plus regulatory add-ons. We use this approach for all products not covered by our IMM permission. Under the IMM approach, EAD is calculated by multiplying the effective expected positive exposure with a multiplier called 'alpha'.

Alpha (set to a default value of 1.4) accounts for several portfolio features that increase EL above that indicated by effective expected positive exposure in the event of default, such as:

• co-variance of exposures;

• correlation between exposures and default;

• level of volatility/correlation that might coincide with a downturn;

• concentration risk; and

• model risk.

The effective expected positive exposure is derived from simulation, pricing and aggregation internal models approved by regulators. The IMM model is subject to ongoing model validation including monthly model performance monitoring.

From a risk management perspective, products not covered by IMM are subject to conservative asset class add-ons, in addition to daily monitoring of credit limit utilisation.

The potential future exposure ('PFE') measures used for CCR management are calibrated to the 95th percentile. The measures consider volatility, trade maturity and the counterparty legal documentation covering netting and collateral.

Limits for CCR exposures are assigned within the overall credit process. The credit risk function assigns a limit against each counterparty to cover exposure which may arise as a result of a counterparty default. The magnitude of this limit will depend on the overall risk appetite and type of derivatives and SFT trading undertaken with the counterparty.

The models and methodologies used in the calculation of CCR are overseen and monitored by the Traded Risk Model Oversight Committee. Models are subject to ongoing monitoring and validation. Additionally, they are subject to independent review at inception and annually thereafter.

Table 48: Analysis of counterparty credit risk exposure by approach (excluding centrally cleared exposures)¹ (CCR1)

 

 

Replacement cost

Potential future exposure

Effective expected positive exposure

Multiplier

EADpost-CRM

RWAs

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Mark-to-market

7.6

 

22.5

 

-

 

-

 

30.1

 

12.4

 

4

Internal Model Method

-

 

-

 

34.8

 

1.4

 

48.7

 

18.7

 

6

- of which: derivatives and long settlement transactions2

-

 

-

 

34.8

 

1.4

 

48.7

 

18.7

 

9

Financial collateral comprehensive method (for SFTs)

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

50.4

 

7.9

 

11

Total at 31 Dec 2019

7.6

 

22.5

 

34.8

 

1.4

 

129.2

 

39.0

 

1

Mark to market

12.6

 

21.5

 

-

 

-

 

34.1

 

13.9

 

4

Internal Model Method

-

 

-

 

29.9

 

1.4

 

41.8

 

16.2

 

6

- of which: derivatives and long settlement transactions2

-

 

-

 

29.9

 

1.4

 

41.8

 

16.2

 

9

Financial collateral comprehensive method (for SFTs)

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

49.3

 

10.2

 

11

Total at 31 Dec 2018

12.6

 

21.5

 

29.9

 

1.4

 

125.2

 

40.3

 

1 As the Group does not use the original exposure method, notional values are not reported.

2 Prior to the implementation of SA-CCR, exposures reported in this row will be those under the mark-to-market method.

Credit valuation adjustment

Credit valuation adjustments ('CVA') represent the risk of loss as a result of adverse changes to the credit quality of counterparties in derivative transactions. Where we have both specific risk VaR approval and IMM approval for a product, the CVA VaR approach has been used to calculate the CVA capital charge.

Where we do not hold both approvals, the standardised approach has been applied. Certain counterparty exposures are exempt from CVA, such as non-financial counterparties and sovereigns.

Table 49: Credit valuation adjustment (CVA) capital charge (CCR2)

 

 

At 31 Dec 2019

At 31 Dec 2018

 

 

EADpost-CRM

RWAs

EADpost-CRM

RWAs

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Total portfolios subject to the Advanced CVA capital charge

22.2

 

3.1

 

21.4

 

4.9

 

2

- VaR component (including the 3 × multiplier)

 

0.5

 

 

0.9

 

3

- stressed VaR component (including the 3 × multiplier)

 

2.6

 

 

4.0

 

4

All portfolios subject to the Standardised CVA capital charge

13.6

 

0.9

 

13.6

 

1.0

 

5

Total subject to the CVA capital charge

35.8

 

4.0

 

35.0

 

5.9

 

The following table presents information on the risk-weighting of CCR exposures under the standardised approach by regulatory portfolio. Further detail on the standardised approach is provided

on page 43. Information on exposures under the IRB approach can be found in Table 78 of Appendix I.

 

 

Table 50: Standardised approach - CCR exposures by regulatory portfolio and risk weights (CCR3)

 

Risk weight

0%

10

%

20

%

50

%

75

%

100

%

150

%

Others

Total credit exposure

of which: unrated

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Central governments and central banks

8.8

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

8.8

 

-

 

2

Regional government or local authorities

2.5

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.5

 

-

 

6

Institutions

-

 

 

-

 

0.1

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

 

7

Corporates

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

2.1

 

-

 

-

 

2.1

 

1.9

 

 

Total at 31 Dec 2019

11.3

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

2.2

 

-

 

-

 

13.6

 

1.9

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Central governments and central banks

7.4

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

7.5

 

-

 

2

Regional government or local authorities

1.0

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1.0

 

0.1

 

6

Institutions

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

7

Corporates

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1.9

 

-

 

-

 

1.9

 

1.6

 

 

Total at 31 Dec 2018

8.4

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

2.0

 

-

 

-

 

10.5

 

1.7

 

Collateral arrangements

Our policy is to revalue all traded transactions and associated collateral positions on a daily basis. An independent collateral management function manages the collateral process, including pledging and receiving collateral and investigating disputes and non-receipts.

Eligible collateral types are controlled under a policy to ensure price transparency, price stability, liquidity, enforceability, independence, reusability and eligibility for regulatory purposes.

 

A valuation 'haircut' policy reflects the fact that collateral may fall in value between the date the collateral was called and the date of liquidation or enforcement. Approximately 99% of collateral held as variation margin under CSAs is either cash or liquid government securities.

Further information on gross fair value exposure and the offset due to legally enforceable netting and collateral is set out on page 304 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

 

Table 51: Impact of netting and collateral held on exposure values (CCR5-A)

 

 

Gross positive fair value or net carrying amount

Netting benefits

Netted current credit exposure

Collateral held

Net credit exposure

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Derivatives

595.4

 

442.8

 

152.6

 

51.9

 

100.7

 

2

SFTs

865.1

 

-

 

865.1

 

814.6

 

50.5

 

4

Total at 31 Dec 2019

1,460.5

 

442.8

 

1,017.7

 

866.5

 

151.2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Derivatives

579.7

 

431.8

 

147.9

 

42.4

 

105.5

 

2

SFTs

983.8

 

-

 

983.8

 

933.1

 

50.7

 

4

Total at 31 Dec 2018

1,563.5

 

431.8

 

1,131.7

 

975.5

 

156.2

 

 

Table 52: Composition of collateral for CCR exposure (CCR5-B)

 

 

Collateral used in derivative transactions

Collateral used in SFTs

 

 

Fair value ofcollateral received

Fair value ofposted collateral

Fair value of collateral received

Fair value of posted collateral

 

 

Segregated

Unsegregated

Segregated

Unsegregated

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Cash - domestic currency

-

 

6.8

 

-

 

7.8

 

57.4

 

98.6

 

2

Cash - other currencies

-

 

48.1

 

-

 

45.3

 

287.4

 

374.1

 

3

Domestic sovereign debt

-

 

7.3

 

0.5

 

6.4

 

90.4

 

64.7

 

4

Other sovereign debt

-

 

5.1

 

2.8

 

11.3

 

327.0

 

275.4

 

5

Government agency debt

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.1

 

6.5

 

1.0

 

6

Corporate bonds

-

 

1.0

 

0.7

 

0.3

 

47.2

 

10.5

 

7

Equity securities

-

 

0.2

 

0.2

 

-

 

39.1

 

40.6

 

8

Other collateral

-

 

0.2

 

2.8

 

1.6

 

1.7

 

0.2

 

9

Total at 31 Dec 2019

-

 

68.9

 

7.0

 

72.8

 

856.7

 

865.1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Cash - domestic currency

-

 

5.6

 

1.6

 

4.9

 

75.9

 

118.9

 

2

Cash - other currencies

-

 

37.6

 

5.5

 

32.6

 

344.1

 

402.0

 

3

Domestic sovereign debt

-

 

5.5

 

-

 

5.2

 

107.7

 

84.6

 

4

Other sovereign debt

-

 

5.8

 

-

 

9.5

 

352.4

 

323.8

 

5

Government agency debt

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.2

 

13.4

 

4.4

 

6

Corporate bonds

-

 

0.7

 

-

 

0.3

 

36.4

 

16.5

 

7

Equity securities

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

36.8

 

32.3

 

8

Other collateral

-

 

0.3

 

-

 

1.2

 

1.4

 

0.5

 

9

Total at 31 Dec 2018

-

 

55.6

 

7.1

 

53.9

 

968.1

 

983.0

 

 

Table 53 shows the credit derivative exposures that HSBC holds, split between those amounts due to client intermediation and those amounts booked as part of HSBC's own credit portfolio.

Where the credit derivative is used to hedge our own portfolio, no counterparty credit risk capital requirement arises.

For a discussion on hedging risk and monitoring the continuing effectiveness of hedges, refer to Note 1.2(h) of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

Table 53: Credit derivatives exposures (CCR6)

 

 

At 31 Dec

 

 

2019

2018

 

 

Protection bought

Protection sold

Protection bought

Protection sold

 

Footnotes

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

Notionals

 

 

 

 

 

Credit derivative products used for own credit portfolio

 

 

 

 

 

- Index credit default swaps

 

9.4

 

7.7

 

2.3

 

-

 

Total notionals used for own credit portfolio

 

9.4

 

7.7

 

2.3

 

-

 

Credit derivative products used for intermediation

1

 

 

 

 

- Index credit default swaps

 

160.7

 

142.0

 

168.6

 

154.0

 

- Total return swaps

 

15.4

 

9.7

 

14.6

 

6.9

 

Total notionals used for intermediation

 

176.1

 

151.7

 

183.2

 

160.9

 

Total credit derivative notionals

 

185.5

 

159.4

 

185.5

 

160.9

 

Fair values

 

 

 

 

 

- Positive fair value (asset)

 

2.4

 

2.3

 

2.6

 

1.2

 

- Negative fair value (liability)

 

(2.8

)

(2.8

)

(1.4

)

(2.4

)

1 This is where we act as an intermediary for our clients, enabling them to take a position in the underlying securities. This does not increase risk for HSBC.

Central counterparties

While exchange traded derivatives have been cleared through central counterparties ('CCPs') for many years, recent regulatory initiatives designed to reduce systemic risk in the banking system are directing increasing volumes of OTC derivatives to be cleared through CCPs.

To manage the significant concentration of risk in CCPs that results from this, we have developed a risk appetite framework to manage risk accordingly, at the level of individual CCPs and globally. A dedicated CCP risk team has been established to manage the interface with CCPs and undertake in-depth due diligence of the unique risks associated with these organisations.

 

Table 54: Exposures to central counterparties (CCR8)

 

 

At 31 Dec 2019

At 31 Dec 2018

 

 

EAD post-CRM

RWAs

EAD post-CRM

RWAs

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Exposures to QCCPs (total)

33.4

 

1.1

 

42.3

 

1.1

 

2

Exposures for trades at QCCPs (excluding initial margin and default fund contributions)

15.2

 

0.3

 

24.8

 

0.5

 

3

- OTC derivatives

5.1

 

0.1

 

9.8

 

0.2

 

4

- exchange-traded derivatives

5.4

 

0.1

 

9.2

 

0.2

 

5

- securities financing transactions

4.7

 

0.1

 

5.8

 

0.1

 

7

Segregated initial margin

6.9

 

-

 

7.1

 

-

 

8

Non-segregated initial margin

11.3

 

0.2

 

10.4

 

0.2

 

9

Pre-funded default fund contributions

-

 

0.6

 

-

 

0.4

 

Wrong-way risk

Wrong-way risk occurs when a counterparty's exposures are adversely correlated with its credit quality.

There are two types of wrong-way risk:

• General wrong-way risk occurs when the probability of counterparty default is positively correlated with general risk factors, for example, where a counterparty is resident and/or incorporated in a higher-risk country and seeks to sell a non-domestic currency in exchange for its home currency.

• Specific wrong-way risk occurs in self-referencing transactions. These are transactions in which exposure is driven by capital or financing instruments issued by the counterparty and occurs where exposure from HSBC's perspective materially increases as the value of the counterparty's capital or financing instruments referenced in the contract decreases. It is HSBC policy that specific wrong-way transactions are approved on a case-by-case basis.

We use a range of tools to monitor and control wrong-way risk, including requiring the business to obtain prior approval before undertaking wrong-way risk transactions outside pre-agreed guidelines.

The regional Traded Risk functions are responsible for the control and monitoring process within an overarching Group framework and limit framework.

Credit rating downgrade

A credit rating downgrade clause in a Master Agreement or a credit rating downgrade threshold clause in a credit support annex ('CSA') is designed to trigger an action if the credit rating of the affected party falls below a specified level. These actions may include the requirement to pay or increase collateral, the termination of transactions by the non-affected party or the assignment of transactions by the affected party.

At 31 December 2019, the value of the additional collateral pertaining to International Swaps and Derivatives Association CSA downgrade thresholds that we would potentially need to post with counterparties in the event of a one-notch downgrade of our rating was $0.2bn (2018: $0.2bn) and for a two-notch downgrade was $0.4bn (2018: $0.4bn).

 

Securitisation

 

Securitisation strategy

HSBC acts as originator, sponsor, liquidity provider and derivative counterparty to our own originated and sponsored securitisations, as well as those of third parties. Our strategy is to use securitisation to meet our needs for aggregate funding or capital management, to the extent that market, regulatory treatments and other conditions are suitable, and for customer facilitation. We do not provide support to any of our originated or sponsored securitisations, and it is not our policy to do so.

We have senior and junior exposures to Mazarin Funding Limited, which is a securities investment conduit ('SIC'). We also hold all of the commercial paper issued by Solitaire Funding Limited. These are considered legacy businesses, and exposures are being repaid as the securities they hold amortise or are sold.

 

Securitisation activity

Our roles in the securitisation process are as follows:

• originator: where we originate the assets being securitised, either directly or indirectly;

• sponsor: where we establish and manage a securitisation programme that purchases exposures from third parties; and

• investor: where we invest in a securitisation transaction directly or provide derivatives or liquidity facilities to a securitisation.

HSBC as originator

We use SPEs to securitise customer loans and advances and other debt that we have originated in order to diversify our sources of funding for asset origination and for capital efficiency purposes. In such cases, we transfer the loans and advances to the SPEs for cash, and the SPEs issue debt securities to investors to fund the cash purchases.

In addition, we use SPEs to mitigate the capital absorbed by some of the customer loans and advances we have originated. Credit derivatives are used to transfer the credit risk associated with such customer loans and advances to an SPE, using an approach commonly known as synthetic securitisation by which the SPE writes CDS protection for HSBC.

HSBC as sponsor

We are sponsor to a number of types of securitisation entities, details of which can be found in the table below.

The Group's exposure to Barion Funding Limited and Malachite Funding Limited at 31 December 2019 is not significant and limited to balances associated with the winding-up of these entities.

Further details are available in Note 20 of the Financial Statements in the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Solitaire

Asset-backed commercial paper ('ABCP') conduit to which a first-loss letter of credit and transaction-specific liquidity facilities are provided

P

P

Look through to risk weights of underlying assets

Regency

Multi-seller conduit to which senior liquidity facilities and programme-wide credit enhancement are provided

P

O

Exposures (including derivatives and liquidity facilities) are risk-weighted as securitisation positions

HSBC as investor

We have exposure to third-party securitisations across a wide range of sectors in the form of investments, liquidity facilities and as a derivative counterparty. These are primarily legacy exposures.

Monitoring of securitisation positions

Securitisation positions are managed by a dedicated team that uses a combination of market standard systems and third-party data providers to monitor performance data and manage market and credit risks.

In the case of re-securitisation positions, similar processes are conducted in respect of the underlying securitisations.

Liquidity risk of securitised assets is consistently managed as part of the Group's liquidity and funding risk management framework.

Valuation of securitisation positions

The process of valuing our investments in securitisation exposures primarily focuses on quotations from third parties, observed trade levels and calibrated valuations from market standard models.

Our hedging and credit risk mitigation strategy, with regards to retained securitisation and re-securitisation exposures, is to continually review our positions.

Securitisation accounting treatment

For accounting purposes, we consolidate structured entities (including SPEs) when the substance of the relationship indicates that we control them; that is, we are exposed, or have rights, to variable returns from our involvement with the structured entity and have the ability to affect those returns through our power over the entity.

Full details of these assessments and our accounting policy on structured entities may be found in Note 1.2(a) and Note 20 on the Financial Statements respectively of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

We reassess the need to consolidate whenever there is a change in the substance of the relationship between HSBC and a structured entity.

HSBC enters into transactions in the normal course of business by which it transfers financial assets to structured entities. Depending on the circumstances, these transfers may either result in these financial assets being fully or partly derecognised, or continuing to be recognised in their entirety.

Full derecognition occurs when we transfer our contractual right to receive cash flows from the financial assets, or assume an obligation to pass on the cash flows from the assets, and transfer substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership. Only in the event that derecognition is achieved are sales and any resultant gains recognised in the financial statements.

Partial derecognition occurs when we sell or otherwise transfer financial assets in such a way that some but not substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership are transferred and control is retained. These financial assets are recognised on the balance sheet to the extent of our continuing involvement and an associated liability is also recognised. The net carrying amount of the financial asset and associated liability will be based on either the amortised cost or the fair value of the rights and obligations retained by the entity, depending upon the measurement basis of the financial asset.

Further disclosure of such transfers may be found in Note 17 on the Financial Statements of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

Securitisation regulatory treatment

For regulatory purposes, any reduction in RWAs that would be achieved by our own originated securitisations must receive the PRA's permission and be justified by a commensurate transfer of credit risk to third parties. If achieved, the associated SPEs and underlying assets are not consolidated but exposures to them, including derivatives or liquidity facilities, are risk-weighted as securitisation positions.

For the majority of the non-trading book securitisation positions we use the IRB approach and, within this, Ratings Based Method ('RBM') and Internal Assessment Approach ('IAA') with lesser amounts on the Supervisory Formula Method ('SFM'). We also use the standardised approach on the non-trading book positions. Securitisation positions in the trading book are overseen within Market Risk under the standardised approach.

Use of the IAA is limited to exposures arising from Regency Assets Limited related to liquidity facilities. Eligible ECAI rating methodology, which includes stress factors, is applied to each asset class in order to derive the equivalent rating level for each transaction. This methodology is verified by the internal credit function as part of the approval process for each new transaction. The performance of each underlying asset portfolio, including residential and commercial mortgages and re-securitisations, is monitored to confirm that the applicable equivalent rating level still applies and is independently verified. Our IAA approach is audited periodically by Internal Audit and reviewed by the PRA.

Further details of our securitisation regulatory treatment may be found on page 17 of this document.

Analysis of securitisation exposures

Our involvement in securitisation activities reflects the following:

• securitisation positions are not backed by revolving exposures other than trade receivables in Regency Assets Limited, which is unchanged from 2018;

• facilities are not subject to early amortisation provisions;

• $7.2bn positions held as synthetic transactions (2018: $3.2bn);

• no assets awaiting securitisation and no material realised losses on securitisation asset disposals during the year;

• unrealised losses on asset-backed securities ('ABS') in the year amounted to $0.2bn (2018: $0.2bn), which relates to assets within SPEs that are consolidated for regulatory purposes; and

• total exposures include off-balance sheet exposure of $11.1bn (2018: $10.9bn), mainly relating to contingent liquidity lines provided to securitisation vehicles where we act as sponsor, with a small amount from derivative exposures where we are an investor. The off-balance sheet exposures are held in the non-trading book and the exposure types are residential mortgages, commercial mortgages, trade receivables and re-securitisations.

Further details of our securitisation exposures may be found on page 287 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

 

Table 55: Securitisation exposure - movement in the year

 

Total at

1 Jan

Movement in year

Total at

31 Dec

 

As originator

As sponsor

As investor

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

Aggregate amount of securitisation exposures

 

 

 

 

 

Residential mortgages

9.2

 

-

 

(0.6

)

1.1

 

9.7

 

Commercial mortgages

2.3

 

-

 

-

 

0.6

 

2.9

 

Credit Cards

1.4

 

-

 

(0.7

)

0.9

 

1.6

 

Leasing

6.0

 

-

 

(1.3

)

1.2

 

5.9

 

Loans to corporates or SMEs

3.3

 

4.0

 

-

 

-

 

7.3

 

Consumer loans

6.8

 

-

 

(0.5

)

0.8

 

7.1

 

Trade receivables

5.4

 

(0.4

)

(0.8

)

0.7

 

4.9

 

Other assets

0.5

 

-

 

-

 

0.3

 

0.8

 

Re-securitisations

0.4

 

-

 

(0.4

)

-

 

-

 

2019

35.3

 

3.6

 

(4.3

)

5.6

 

40.2

 

 

 

Table 56: Securitisation - asset values and impairments

 

 

2019

2018

 

 

Underlying assets1

Securitisationexposuresimpairment

Underlying assets1

Securitisationexposuresimpairment

 

 

Total3

Impaired and past due

Total3

Impaired and past due

 

Footnotes

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

As originator

 

10.7

 

-

 

-

 

5.4

 

-

 

-

 

- loans to corporates and SMEs

 

10.7

 

-

 

-

 

5.0

 

-

 

-

 

- trade receivables

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

- re-securitisations

2

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

As sponsor

 

15.6

 

0.2

 

-

 

19.9

 

-

 

-

 

- residential mortgages

 

3.7

 

-

 

-

 

4.3

 

-

 

-

 

- commercial mortgages

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

- credit cards

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.7

 

-

 

-

 

- leasing

 

4.3

 

-

 

-

 

5.6

 

-

 

-

 

- loans to corporates and SMEs

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

- consumer loans

 

3.1

 

0.2

 

-

 

3.6

 

-

 

-

 

- trade receivables

 

4.2

 

-

 

-

 

5.0

 

-

 

-

 

- re-securitisations

2

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

- other assets

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

At 31 Dec

 

26.3

 

0.2

 

-

 

25.3

 

-

 

-

 

1 Securitisation exposures may exceed the underlying asset values when HSBC provides liquidity facilities while also acting as derivative counterparty and a note holder in the SPE.

2 The amount of underlying assets reported for re-securitisations denotes the value of collateral within the re-securitisation vehicles.

3 As originator and sponsor, all associated underlying assets are held in the non-trading book. These assets are all underlying to traditional securitisations with the exception of 'loans to corporates and SMEs', which is underlying to a synthetic securitisation.

Table 57: Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book (SEC1)

 

 

Bank acts as originator

 

Bank acts as sponsor

 

Bank acts as investor

 

 

Traditional

Synthetic

Sub-total

 

Traditional

Synthetic

Sub-total

 

Traditional

Synthetic

Sub-total

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Retail (total)

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

11.0

 

-

 

11.0

 

 

10.0

 

-

 

10.0

 

2

- residential mortgage

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

3.7

 

-

 

3.7

 

 

4.5

 

-

 

4.5

 

3

- credit card

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

1.5

 

-

 

1.5

 

4

- other retail exposures

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

7.3

 

-

 

7.3

 

 

4.0

 

-

 

4.0

 

5

- re-securitisation

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

6

Wholesale (total)

-

 

7.2

 

7.2

 

 

4.6

 

-

 

4.6

 

 

3.7

 

-

 

3.7

 

7

- loans to corporates

-

 

7.2

 

7.2

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

8

- commercial mortgage

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

 

1.9

 

-

 

1.9

 

9

- lease and receivables

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

4.3

 

-

 

4.3

 

 

1.6

 

-

 

1.6

 

10

- other wholesale

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.2

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

11

- re-securitisation

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

Total at 31 Dec 2019

-

 

7.2

 

7.2

 

 

15.6

 

-

 

15.6

 

 

13.7

 

-

 

13.7

 

 

- of which:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

securitisations under the new framework

 

-

 

5.2

 

5.2

 

 

7.2

 

-

 

7.2

 

 

7.3

 

-

 

7.3

 

 

securitisations under the pre-existing

framework

-

 

2.0

 

2.0

 

 

8.4

 

-

 

8.4

 

 

6.4

 

-

 

6.4

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1

Retail (total)

0.4

 

-

 

0.4

 

 

13.6

 

-

 

13.6

 

 

6.8

 

-

 

6.8

 

2

- residential mortgage

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

4.3

 

-

 

4.3

 

 

3.8

 

-

 

3.8

 

3

- credit card

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

0.7

 

-

 

0.7

 

 

0.5

 

-

 

0.5

 

4

- other retail exposures

0.4

 

-

 

0.4

 

 

8.6

 

-

 

8.6

 

 

2.5

 

-

 

2.5

 

5

- re-securitisation

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

6

Wholesale (total)

-

 

3.2

 

3.2

 

 

6.3

 

-

 

6.3

 

 

2.1

 

-

 

2.1

 

7

- loans to corporates

-

 

3.2

 

3.2

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

8

- commercial mortgage

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

 

1.5

 

-

 

1.5

 

9

- lease and receivables

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

5.6

 

-

 

5.6

 

 

0.4

 

-

 

0.4

 

10

- other wholesale

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.2

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

11

- re-securitisation

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

0.4

 

-

 

0.4

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

Total at 31 Dec 2018

0.4

 

3.2

 

3.6

 

 

19.9

 

-

 

19.9

 

 

8.9

 

-

 

8.9

 

 

 

Table 58: Securitisation exposures in the trading book (SEC2)

 

 

At

 

 

31 Dec 2019

31 Dec 2018

 

 

Bank acts as investor1

Bank acts as investor1

 

 

Traditional

Synthetic

Sub-total

Traditional

Synthetic

Sub-total

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

Retail (total)

2.3

 

-

 

2.3

 

2.0

 

-

 

2.0

 

2

- residential mortgage

1.5

 

-

 

1.5

 

1.1

 

-

 

1.1

 

3

- credit card

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.2

 

4

- other retail exposures

0.7

 

-

 

0.7

 

0.7

 

-

 

0.7

 

6

Wholesale (total)

1.4

 

-

 

1.4

 

0.9

 

-

 

0.9

 

7

- loans to corporates

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

8

- commercial mortgage

0.9

 

-

 

0.9

 

0.7

 

-

 

0.7

 

9

- lease and receivables

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

10

- other wholesale

0.5

 

-

 

0.5

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.2

 

 

Total (all portfolios)

3.7

 

-

 

3.7

 

2.9

 

-

 

2.9

 

 

- of which:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

securitisations under the new framework

3.0

 

-

 

3.0

 

N/A

N/A

N/A

 

securitisations under the pre-existing framework

0.7

 

-

 

0.7

 

2.9

 

-

 

2.9

 

1 HSBC does not act as originator or sponsor for securitisation exposures in the trading book.

The following tables present the Group's exposure in the non-trading book and associated regulatory capital requirements where the Group acts as originator or as sponsor. Table 59.i presents the Group's exposures under the pre-existing securitisation framework, whereas Table 59.ii presents the exposures the Group has taken on since 1 January 2019 under the new securitisation framework.

Table 59.i: Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated capital requirements - bank acting as originator or sponsor (under the pre-existing framework) (SEC3)

 

 

Exposure values (by risk weight bands)

 

Exposure values (by regulatory approach)

 

 

≤20% RW

>20% to 50% RW

>50% to 100% RW

>100% to 1,250% RW

1,250% RW

 

IRB RBM (including IAA)

IRB SFA

SA

1,250%

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

2

Traditional securitisation

7.4

 

0.5

 

0.5

 

-

 

-

 

 

7.6

 

-

 

0.8

 

-

 

3

Securitisation

7.4

 

0.5

 

0.5

 

-

 

-

 

 

7.6

 

-

 

0.8

 

-

 

4

- retail underlying

5.4

 

0.5

 

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

 

5.5

 

-

 

0.8

 

-

 

5

- wholesale

2.0

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

 

2.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

6

Re-securitisation

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

7

- senior

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

8

- non-senior

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

9

Synthetic securitisation

1.7

 

-

 

0.3

 

-

 

-

 

 

2.0

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

10

Securitisation

1.7

 

-

 

0.3

 

-

 

-

 

 

2.0

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

11

- retail underlying

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

12

- wholesale

1.7

 

-

 

0.3

 

-

 

-

 

 

2.0

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1

Total at 31 Dec 2019

9.1

 

0.5

 

0.8

 

-

 

-

 

 

9.6

 

-

 

0.8

 

-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Traditional securitisation

19.0

 

0.2

 

0.8

 

0.2

 

0.1

 

 

19.5

 

-

 

0.7

 

0.1

 

3

Securitisation

19.0

 

-

 

0.8

 

0.1

 

-

 

 

19.2

 

-

 

0.7

 

-

 

4

- retail underlying

13.2

 

-

 

0.7

 

0.1

 

-

 

 

13.3

 

-

 

0.7

 

-

 

5

- wholesale

5.8

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

 

5.9

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

6

Re-securitisation

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

 

0.3

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

7

- senior

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

8

- non-senior

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

 

0.3

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

9

Synthetic securitisation

2.9

 

-

 

-

 

0.3

 

-

 

 

3.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

10

Securitisation

2.9

 

-

 

-

 

0.3

 

-

 

 

3.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

11

- retail underlying

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

12

- wholesale

2.9

 

-

 

-

 

0.3

 

-

 

 

3.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1

Total at 31 Dec 2018

21.9

 

0.2

 

0.8

 

0.5

 

0.1

 

 

22.7

 

-

 

0.7

 

0.1

 

 

Table 59.i: Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated capital requirements - bank acting as originator or sponsor (under the pre-existing framework) (SEC3) (continued)

 

 

RWAs (by regulatory approach)

 

Capital charge after cap

 

 

IRB RBM (including IAA)

IRB SFA

SA

1,250%

 

IRB RBM (including IAA)

IRB SFA

SA

1,250%

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

2

Traditional securitisation

1.0

 

-

 

0.6

 

-

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

3

Securitisation

1.0

 

-

 

0.6

 

-

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

4

- retail underlying

0.6

 

-

 

0.6

 

-

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

5

- wholesale

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

6

Re-securitisation

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

7

- senior

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

8

- non-senior

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

9

Synthetic securitisation

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

10

Securitisation

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

11

- retail underlying

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

12

- wholesale

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1

Total at 31 Dec 2019

1.4

 

-

 

0.6

 

0.1

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Traditional securitisation

2.5

 

-

 

0.7

 

1.4

 

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

3

Securitisation

2.0

 

-

 

0.7

 

0.6

 

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

4

- retail underlying

1.5

 

-

 

0.7

 

0.5

 

 

0.2

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

5

- wholesale

0.5

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

6

Re-securitisation

0.5

 

-

 

-

 

0.8

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

7

- senior

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

8

- non-senior

0.5

 

-

 

-

 

0.8

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

9

Synthetic securitisation

0.8

 

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

10

Securitisation

0.8

 

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

11

- retail underlying

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

12

- wholesale

0.8

 

-

 

-

 

0.2

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1

Total at 31 Dec 2018

3.3

 

-

 

0.7

 

1.6

 

 

0.3

 

-

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

 

The reduction in RWA is mainly due to the disposal of non-senior, resecuritisation exposure in the legacy book and renewal of pre-existing positions moving to the new securitisation framework.

Table 59.ii: Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated capital requirements - bank acting as originator or sponsor (under the new framework) (SEC3)

 

 

Exposure values (by risk weight bands)

 

Exposure values (by regulatory approach)

 

 

≤20% RW

>20% to 50% RW

>50% to 100% RW

>100% to 1,250% RW

1,250% RW

 

SEC-IRBA

SEC-ERBA

SEC IAA

SEC-SA

1,250%

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

2

Traditional securitisation

4.0

 

2.9

 

0.2

 

0.1

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

7.1

 

0.1

 

-

 

3

Securitisation

4.0

 

2.9

 

0.2

 

0.1

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

7.1

 

0.1

 

-

 

4

- retail underlying

1.8

 

2.6

 

0.2

 

0.1

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

4.6

 

0.1

 

-

 

5

- wholesale

2.2

 

0.3

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

2.5

 

-

 

-

 

9

Synthetic securitisation

5.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

5.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

10

Securitisation

5.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

5.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

11

- retail underlying

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

12

- wholesale

5.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

5.2

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1

Total at 31 Dec 2019

9.2

 

2.9

 

0.2

 

0.1

 

-

 

 

5.2

 

-

 

7.1

 

0.1

 

-

 

 

 

 

RWAs (by regulatory approach)

 

Capital charge after cap

 

 

SEC-IRBA

SEC-ERBA

SEC IAA

SEC-SA

1,250%

 

SEC-IRBA

SEC-ERBA

SEC IAA

SEC-SA

1,250%

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

2

Traditional securitisation

-

 

-

 

1.7

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

3

Securitisation

-

 

-

 

1.7

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

4

- retail underlying

-

 

-

 

1.2

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

5

- wholesale

-

 

-

 

0.5

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

9

Synthetic securitisation

0.9

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.4

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

10

Securitisation

0.9

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.4

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

11

- retail underlying

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

12

- wholesale

0.9

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.4

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1

Total at 31 Dec 2019

0.9

 

-

 

1.7

 

-

 

0.4

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

The following tables present the Group's exposure in the non-trading book and associated regulatory capital requirements where the Group acts as an investor. Table 60.i presents the

Group's exposures under the pre-existing securitisation framework, whereas table 60.ii presents the exposures the Group has taken on since 1 January 2019 under the new securitisation framework.

 

Table 60.i: Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated capital requirements - bank acting as investor (under the pre-existing framework) (SEC4)

 

 

Exposure values (by risk weight bands)

 

Exposure values (by regulatory approach)

 

 

≤20% RW

>20% to 50% RW

>50% to 100% RW

>100% to 1,250% RW

1,250% RW

 

IRB RBM (including IAA)

IRB SFA

SA

1,250%

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

2

Traditional securitisation

5.2

 

0.6

 

0.6

 

-

 

-

 

 

5.4

 

-

 

1.0

 

-

 

3

Securitisation

5.2

 

0.6

 

0.6

 

-

 

-

 

 

5.4

 

-

 

1.0

 

-

 

4

- retail underlying

3.1

 

0.6

 

0.6

 

-

 

-

 

 

3.3

 

-

 

1.0

 

-

 

5

- wholesale

2.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

2.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1

Total at 31 Dec 2019

5.2

 

0.6

 

0.6

 

-

 

-

 

 

5.4

 

-

 

1.0

 

-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Traditional securitisation

7.0

 

0.6

 

1.3

 

-

 

-

 

 

6.9

 

-

 

2.0

 

-

 

3

Securitisation

7.0

 

0.6

 

1.3

 

-

 

-

 

 

6.9

 

-

 

2.0

 

-

 

4

- retail underlying

5.0

 

0.6

 

1.2

 

-

 

-

 

 

4.8

 

-

 

2.0

 

-

 

5

- wholesale

2.0

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

 

2.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1

Total at 31 Dec 2018

7.0

 

0.6

 

1.3

 

-

 

-

 

 

6.9

 

-

 

2.0

 

-

 

 

 

 

RWAs (by regulatory approach)

 

Capital charge after cap

 

 

IRB RBM (including IAA)

IRB SFA

SA

1,250%

 

IRB RBM (including IAA)

IRB SFA

SA

1,250%

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

2

Traditional securitisation

0.7

 

-

 

0.7

 

0.2

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

3

Securitisation

0.7

 

-

 

0.7

 

0.2

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

4

- retail underlying

0.3

 

-

 

0.7

 

0.2

 

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

5

- wholesale

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1

Total at 31 Dec 2019

0.7

 

-

 

0.7

 

0.2

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2

Traditional securitisation

0.9

 

-

 

1.5

 

0.4

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

3

Securitisation

0.9

 

-

 

1.5

 

0.4

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

4

- retail underlying

0.5

 

-

 

1.5

 

0.3

 

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

5

- wholesale

0.4

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1

Total at 31 Dec 2018

0.9

 

-

 

1.5

 

0.4

 

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

 

Table 60.ii: Securitisation exposures in the non-trading book and associated capital requirements - bank acting as investor (under the new framework) (SEC4)

 

 

Exposure values (by risk weight bands)

 

Exposure values (by regulatory approach)

 

 

≤20% RW

>20% to 50% RW

>50% to 100% RW

>100% to 1,250% RW

1,250% RW

 

SEC-IRBA

SEC-ERBA

SEC IAA

SEC-SA

1,250%

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

2

Traditional securitisation

6.1

 

0.7

 

0.4

 

0.1

 

-

 

 

-

 

1.7

 

-

 

5.6

 

-

 

3

Securitisation

6.1

 

0.7

 

0.4

 

0.1

 

-

 

 

-

 

1.7

 

-

 

5.6

 

-

 

4

- retail underlying

4.6

 

0.7

 

0.2

 

0.1

 

-

 

 

-

 

1.4

 

-

 

4.2

 

-

 

5

- wholesale

1.5

 

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

-

 

 

-

 

0.3

 

-

 

1.4

 

-

 

1

Total at 31 Dec 2019

6.1

 

0.7

 

0.4

 

0.1

 

-

 

 

-

 

1.7

 

-

 

5.6

 

-

 

 

 

 

RWAs (by regulatory approach)

 

Capital charge after cap

 

 

SEC-IRBA

SEC-ERBA

SEC IAA

SEC-SA

1,250%

 

SEC-IRBA

SEC-ERBA

SEC IAA

SEC-SA

1,250%

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

2

Traditional securitisation

-

 

0.5

 

-

 

1.1

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

3

Securitisation

-

 

0.5

 

-

 

1.1

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

4

- retail underlying

-

 

0.4

 

-

 

0.9

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

5

- wholesale

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

0.2

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

1

Total at 31 Dec 2019

-

 

0.5

 

-

 

1.1

 

-

 

 

-

 

-

 

-

 

0.1

 

-

 

Market risk

 

Overview of market risk in global businesses

Market risk is the risk that movements in market factors, such as foreign exchange rates, interest rates, credit spreads, equity prices and commodity prices, will reduce our income or the value of our portfolios.

Exposure to market risk

Exposure to market risk is separated into two portfolio types:

• Trading portfolios: these comprise positions held for client servicing and market-making, with the intention of short-term resale and/or to hedge risks resulting from such positions.

• Non-trading portfolios: these comprise positions that primarily arise from the interest rate management of our retail and commercial banking assets and liabilities, financial investments measured at fair value through other comprehensive income, debt instruments measured at amortised cost, and exposures arising from our insurance operations.

Where appropriate, we apply similar risk management policies and measurement techniques to both trading and non-trading portfolios. Our objective is to manage and control market risk exposures to optimise return on risk while maintaining a market risk profile consistent with our established risk appetite.

For a discussion on hedging risk and monitoring the continuing effectiveness of hedges, refer to page 135 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019.

The tables below reflect the components of capital requirement under the standardised approach, Table 61 and the internal model approach, Table 62 for market risk.

Table 61: Market risk under standardised approach (MR1)

 

 

At 31 Dec

 

 

2019

2018

2019

 

 

RWAs

RWAs

Capital requirements

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

 

Outright products

 

 

 

1

Interest rate risk (general and specific)

2.6

 

2.5

 

0.2

 

2

Equity risk (general and specific)

0.1

 

0.1

 

-

 

3

Foreign exchange risk

3.7

 

1.4

 

0.3

 

4

Commodity risk

0.1

 

-

 

-

 

 

Options

 

 

 

6

Delta-plus method

0.1

 

0.1

 

-

 

7

Scenario approach

-

 

-

 

-

 

8

Securitisation

1.2

 

1.6

 

0.1

 

9

Total

7.8

 

5.7

 

0.6

 

 

Table 62: Market risk under IMA (MR2-A)

 

 

2019

2018

 

 

RWAs

Capital required

RWAs

Capital required

 

 

$bn

$bn

$bn

$bn

1

VaR (higher of values a and b)

5.3

 

0.4

 

7.1

 

0.6

 

(a)

Previous day's VaR

 

0.1

 

 

0.1

 

(b)

Average daily VaR1

 

0.4

 

 

0.6

 

2

Stressed VaR (higher of values a and b)

8.0

 

0.7

 

12.1

 

1.0

 

(a)

Latest SVaR

 

0.1

 

 

0.2

 

(b)

Average SVaR1

 

0.7

 

 

1.0

 

3

Incremental risk charge (higher of values a and b)

6.6

 

0.5

 

6.4

 

0.5

 

(a)

Most recent IRC value

 

0.5

 

 

0.4

 

(b)

Average IRC value1

 

0.5

 

 

0.5

 

5

Other

2.2

 

0.2

 

4.5

 

0.3

 

6

Total at 31 Dec

22.1

 

1.8

 

30.1

 

2.4

 

1 VaR average values are calculated on a 60 business days basis. SVaR and IRC average values are calculated on a 12-week basis.

Under the IMA approach, the decrease in VaR and SVaR is largely due to the increased diversification benefits following regulatory approval to expand the regulatory scope of consolidation and reduced exposure.

Market risk governance

The majority of the total VaR, stressed VaR ('SVaR') and incremental risk charge ('IRC') of HSBC and almost all trading VaR resides in GB&M. GB&M manages the Group's market risk, using risk limits approved by the GB&M CRO.

For a discussion on market risk governance refer to page 135 of the Annual Report and Accounts 2019. 

 

Market risk measures

Monitoring and limiting market risk exposures

Our objective is to manage and control market risk exposures while maintaining a market risk profile consistent with our risk appetite. We use a range of tools to monitor and limit market risk exposures including sensitivity analysis, VaR and stress testing.

Sensitivity analysis

We use sensitivity measures to monitor the market risk positions within each risk type. Granular sensitivity limits are set primarily

for trading desks with consideration of market liquidity, customer demand and capital constraints, amongst other factors.

Value at risk

Value at risk ('VaR') is a technique that estimates the potential losses on risk positions in the trading portfolio as a result of movements in market rates and prices over a specified time horizon and to a given level of confidence. The use of VaR is integrated into market risk management and is calculated for all trading positions regardless of how we capitalise those exposures.

In addition, we use VaR for non-trading portfolios. Our models are predominantly based on historical simulation. VaR is calculated at a 99% confidence level for a one-day holding period, although a long period is additionally used for non-trading positions.

Our VaR models use historical series of market rates and prices, implicitly taking into account inter-relationships between different markets and rates such as interest rates and foreign exchange rates.

The primary categories of risk factors driving market risk are summarised below:

 

 

Foreign exchange

Risk arising from changes in foreign exchange rates and volatilities.

Interest rate

Risk arising from changes in the level of interest rates that may impact prices of interest rate sensitive assets such as interest rate swaps.

Equity

Risk arising from changes in equity prices, volatilities and dividend yields.

Commodity

Risk arising from changes in commodity prices.

Our models use a mixed approach when applying changes in market rates and prices:

• For equity, credit and foreign exchange risk factors, VaR scenarios are calculated on a relative return basis.

• For interest rates, a mixed approach is used. The scenarios applied to volatilities are on a relative return basis, whereas the scenarios applied to interest rate curves are calculated using a hybrid of absolute and relative returns. This approach enables the VaR to smoothly adapt to either low or high interest rate environments.

We use the past two years as the historical data set in our VaR models and the scenarios are updated on a fortnightly basis. These scenarios are then applied to the market baselines and positions on a daily basis. The models incorporate the effect of option features on the underlying exposures.The valuation approach used in our models varies:

• non-linear instruments use a full revaluation approach; and

• linear instruments, such as bonds and swaps, use a sensitivity-based approach.

The nature of the VaR models means that an increase in observed market volatility will lead to an increase in VaR even without any changes in the underlying positions.

VaR model limitations

Although a valuable guide to risk, VaR is used with awareness of its limitations, for example:

The use of historical data as a proxy for estimating future events may not encompass all potential events, particularly those which are extreme in nature.

The use of a 1-day holding period for risk management purposes of trading and non-trading books assumes that this short period is sufficient to hedge or liquidate all positions.

The use of a 99% confidence level by definition does not take into account losses that might occur beyond this level of confidence.

VaR is calculated on the basis of exposures outstanding at close of business and therefore does not necessarily reflect intra-day exposures.

Risk not in VaR framework

The risks not in VaR ('RNIV') framework captures risks from exposures in the HSBC trading book that are not captured well by the VaR model. Our VaR model is designed to capture significant basis risk such as CDS versus bond, asset swap spreads and cross-currency basis. Other basis risks that are not completely covered in VaR, such as CCP swap basis risks, are complemented by our RNIV calculations and are integrated into our capital framework.

Risk factors are reviewed on a regular basis and are either incorporated directly in the VaR models, where possible, or quantified through the VaR-based RNIV approach or a stress test approach within the RNIV framework. While VaR-based RNIVs are calculated by using historical scenarios, stress-type RNIVs are estimated on the basis of stress scenarios whose severity is calibrated to be in line with the capital adequacy requirements. The outcome of the VaR-based RNIV approach is included in the overall VaR calculation but excluded from the VaR measures used for regulatory back-testing. In addition, stressed VaR also captures risk factors considered in the VaR-based RNIV approach through a corresponding stressed VaR RNIV.

Stress-type RNIVs include a gap risk exposure measure to capture risk on non-recourse margin loans and a de-peg risk measure to capture risk to pegged and heavily managed currencies.

Back-testing

We validate daily the accuracy of our VaR models by back-testing them against both actual and hypothetical profit and loss. Hypothetical profit and loss excludes non-modelled items such as fees, commissions and revenues of intra-day transactions.

The actual number of profits or losses in excess of VaR over this period can therefore be used to gauge how well the models are performing. We consider enhanced internal monitoring of a VaR model if more than five profit exceptions or more than five loss exceptions occur in a 250-day period.

We back-test our VaR at various levels of our Group entity hierarchy. Back-testing using the regulatory hierarchy includes entities which have approval to use VaR in the calculation of market risk regulatory capital requirement.

HSBC submits separate back-testing results to regulators, including the PRA and the European Central Bank, based on applicable frequencies ranging from two business days after an exception occurs, to quarterly submissions.

In terms of the CRD IV rules, VaR back-testing loss, and not profit, exceptions count towards the multiplier determined by the PRA for the purposes of the capital requirement calculation for market risk. The multiplier is increased if there are five or more loss exceptions in a 250-day period.

The following graphs show a one-year history for VaR back-testing exceptions against both actual and hypothetical profit and loss.

In 2019, the Group experienced six profit back-testing exceptions and one loss back-testing exception against actual profit and loss. Some of these exceptions were driven by profits spread across a large number of desks or arose from new trades, which are outside trading VaR scope. The above exceptions comprised:

• a profit exception in early January, driven by gains across most asset classes, as interest rates rose and equity markets rebounded;

• a profit exception in late January, due mainly to gains from new transactions in the Rates business and lower equity volatilities;

• a profit exception in March, driven by increased volatility in some emerging markets currencies and interest rates;

• a loss exception in March, attributable to month-end valuation adjustments driven by portfolio and spread changes;

• two profit exceptions in early May, arising from new transactions and a number of relatively small gains spread across all asset classes; and

• a profit exception in December, due to gains from multiple desks and spread across all asset classes.

The Group also experienced one profit back-testing exception and one loss back-testing exception against hypothetical profit and loss;

 

 

• a loss exception in November 2019 driven primarily by the impact of the widening of the credit spread on a high-yield bond holding; and

• a profit exception in December, due to gains from multiple desks and spread across all asset classes.

 

Comparison of VaR estimates with gains/losses

VaR back-testing exceptions against actual profit and loss ($m)

 

 

Actual profit and loss

 

VaR

w

Back-testing profit exception

 

 

 

 

VaR back-testing exceptions against hypothetical profit and loss ($m)

http://www.rns-pdf.londonstockexchange.com/rns/2814D_1-2020-2-17.pdf

 

Hypothetical profit and loss

 

VaR

w

Back-testing profit exception

 

 

 

Stress testing

Stress testing is an integral part of our market risk management framework to evaluate the potential impact on portfolio values of more extreme, although plausible, events or movements in a set of financial variables. In such scenarios, losses can be greater than those predicted by VaR modelling.

Stress testing is implemented at legal entity, regional and overall Group levels. A set of scenarios is used consistently across all regions within the Group. The risk appetite around potential stress losses for the Group is set and monitored against referral limits.

Market risk reverse stress tests are designed to identify vulnerabilities in our portfolios by looking for scenarios that lead to loss levels considered severe for the relevant portfolio. These scenarios may be quite local or idiosyncratic in nature, and complement the systematic top-down stress testing.

Stressed VaR and stress testing, together with reverse stress testing and the management of gap risk, provide senior

management with insights regarding the 'tail risk' beyond VaR, for which HSBC's appetite is limited.

The market risk stress testing incorporates the historical and hypothetical events.

During 2019, we ran stress scenarios for specific geopolitical and economic events including several Brexit scenarios, Global Trade war, and the UK elections in Q2 and Q4. We are also actively monitoring our portfolio in Hong Kong and we have performed internal stress tests and scenario analysis. These new scenarios were run in addition to existing scenarios that capture potential events of concern.

Market risk capital models

HSBC has permission to use a number of market risk capital models to calculate regulatory capital as listed in the table below. For regulatory purposes, the trading book comprises all positions in financial instruments and commodities held with trading intent and positions where it can be demonstrated that they hedge positions in the trading book. Trading book positions must either be free of any restrictive covenants on their tradability or be capable of being hedged.

A financial instrument is defined as any contract that gives rise to both a financial asset to one party and a financial liability or equity instrument to another party.

HSBC maintains a trading book policy, which defines the minimum requirements for trading book positions and the process for classifying positions as trading or non-trading book. Positions in the trading book are subject to market risk-based rules, i.e. market risk capital, calculated using regulatory approved models. Where we do not have permission to use internal models, market risk capital is calculated using the standardised approach.

If any of the policy criteria are not met, then the position is categorised as a non-trading book exposure.

 

 

 

 

 

 

VaR

99

%

10 day

Uses most recent two years' history of daily returns to determine a loss distribution. The result is scaled, using the square root of 10, to provide an equivalent 10-day loss.

Stressed VaR

99

%

10 day

Stressed VaR is calibrated to a one-year period of stress observed in history.

IRC

99.9

%

1 year

Uses a multi-factor Gaussian Monte-Carlo simulation, which includes product basis, concentration, hedge mismatch, recovery rate and liquidity as part of the simulation process. A minimum liquidity horizon of three months is applied and is based on a combination of factors, including issuer type, currency and size of exposure.

Non-proprietary details of these models are available in the Financial Services Register on the PRA website.

Table 63: IMA values for trading portfolios¹ (MR3)

 

 

At 31 Dec

 

 

2019

2018

 

 

$m

$m

VaR (10 day 99%)

 

 

1

Maximum value

185.2

 

210.0

 

2

Average value

149.3

 

182.9

 

3

Minimum value

116.8

 

160.3

 

4

Period end

128.0

 

193.2

 

Stressed VaR (10 day 99%)

 

 

5

Maximum value

222.8

 

408.5

 

6

Average value

172.3

 

256.8

 

7

Minimum value

133.1

 

194.9

 

8

Period end

222.8

 

408.5

 

Incremental risk charge (99.9%)

 

 

9

Maximum value

1,076.9

 

743.7

 

10

Average value

706.2

 

603.9

 

11

Minimum value

448.9

 

424.9

 

12

Period end

465.8

 

492.7

 

1 Comparatives as at 31 December 2018 for averages, maximums and minimums were restated in compliance with EBA guidance. Maximum, average and minimum values are calculated on a six-month basis.

VaR

VaR used for regulatory purposes differs from VaR used for management purposes with key differences listed below.

 

 

 

Scope

Regulatory approval (PRA)

Broader population of trading and non-trading book positions

Confidence interval

99%

99%

Liquidity horizon

10 day

1 day

Data set

Past 2 years

Past 2 years

The trading books that received approval from the regulator to be covered via an internal model are used to calculate VaR for regulatory purposes. Overall regulatory VaR also includes VaR-based RNIVs. Regulatory VaR levels contribute to the calculation of market risk RWAs.

 

 

The regulatory VaR table is calculated on consolidated positions according to the regulatory permissions received, plus aggregated sites. This differs from the daily VaR reported in the Annual Report and Accounts 2019, which shows a fully diversified view used for internal risk management.

Trading VaR used for regulatory capital purposes decreased in 2019 primarily due to lower contributions from:

• exposures to credit spread and interest rate risks;

• equity correlation and interest rate volatility risks captured in the RNIV framework.

Stressed VaR

Stressed VaR is primarily used for regulatory capital purposes and is integrated into the risk management process to ensure prudent capital management. Stressed VaR complements other risk measures by providing the potential losses under stressed market conditions.

Stressed VaR modelling follows the same approach as our VaR risk measure except that:

• potential market movements employed for stressed VaR calculations are based on a continuous one-year period of stress for the trading portfolio;

• the choice of period is based on the assessment at the Group level of the most volatile period in recent history. This is assessed quarterly and changed during 2019 as follows:

• to (March 2010 to February 2011) in March 2019;

• to (December 2010 to November 2011) in June 2019;

• to (July 2007 to July 2008) in September 2019; and

• to (April 2016 to March 2017) in December 2019;

• it is calculated to a 99% confidence using a 10-day holding period; and

• it is based on an actual 10-day holding period, whereas regulatory VaR is based on a one-day holding period scaled to 10 days.

The decrease in stressed VaR during 2019 was spread across all asset classes, including lower contributions from the foreign exchange options trading, flow fixed income activity and the equity prime finance business.

This information is provided by RNS, the news service of the London Stock Exchange. RNS is approved by the Financial Conduct Authority to act as a Primary Information Provider in the United Kingdom. Terms and conditions relating to the use and distribution of this information may apply. For further information, please contact rns@lseg.com or visit www.rns.com.
 
END
 
 
FR KZGMZFNFGGZZ
Date   Source Headline
3rd May 20243:20 pmRNSAGM poll results + changes Board+Ctte composition
3rd May 202411:06 amRNSHSBC Holdings plc - AGM Statements
1st May 20244:30 pmRNSDirector Declaration
1st May 20244:00 pmRNSPublication of base prospectus supplement
30th Apr 20244:15 pmRNSDirector/PDMR Shareholding
30th Apr 20247:00 amRNSHSBC Holdings 1Q 2024 webcast presentation
30th Apr 20247:00 amRNSRetirement of Group Chief Executive
30th Apr 20247:00 amRNSHSBC Holdings 1Q24 earnings release
29th Apr 20244:30 pmRNSTotal Voting Rights
29th Apr 20244:15 pmRNSDirector/PDMR Shareholding
23rd Apr 20246:04 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares & Conclusion of Buy-Back
22nd Apr 20245:59 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
19th Apr 20245:57 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
19th Apr 20248:40 amRNSPost Stabilisation Notice
18th Apr 20245:58 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
18th Apr 202410:00 amRNSOverseas Regulatory Announcement - Board Meeting
17th Apr 20246:15 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
16th Apr 20246:00 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
15th Apr 20246:24 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
15th Apr 20241:00 pmRNSFourth Interim Dividend for 2023 - Exchange Rate
12th Apr 20245:57 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
12th Apr 20243:35 pmRNSNotice of redemption
11th Apr 20246:25 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
11th Apr 202410:00 amRNSOverseas Regulatory Announcement - Grant of Awards
10th Apr 20246:09 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
9th Apr 20245:53 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
9th Apr 20247:00 amRNSHSBC AGREES TO SELL ITS BUSINESS IN ARGENTINA
8th Apr 20246:10 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
5th Apr 202410:00 amRNSDirector Declaration
4th Apr 20246:24 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
3rd Apr 20246:14 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
2nd Apr 20245:59 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
2nd Apr 20247:00 amRNSCompletion of the sale of HSBC Bank Canada to RBC
28th Mar 20246:01 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
28th Mar 20244:30 pmRNSDirector/PDMR Shareholding
28th Mar 20244:00 pmRNSTotal Voting Rights
27th Mar 20245:58 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
27th Mar 20243:45 pmRNSPublication of base prospectus
26th Mar 20245:54 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
25th Mar 20245:58 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
22nd Mar 20245:50 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
22nd Mar 20242:00 pmRNSIssuance of subordinated unsecured notes
22nd Mar 202410:00 amRNS2024 AGM - Documents available at NSM
21st Mar 20246:03 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
21st Mar 202411:00 amRNSIssuance of subordinated unsecured notes
20th Mar 20245:51 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
20th Mar 202410:00 amRNSHong Kong Waiver-Contingent Convertible Securities
19th Mar 20245:46 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares
19th Mar 202410:00 amRNSOverseas Regulatory Announcement - Grant of Awards
18th Mar 20245:54 pmRNSTransaction in Own Shares

Due to London Stock Exchange licensing terms, we stipulate that you must be a private investor. We apologise for the inconvenience.

To access our Live RNS you must confirm you are a private investor by using the button below.

Login to your account

Don't have an account? Click here to register.

Quickpicks are a member only feature

Login to your account

Don't have an account? Click here to register.